JP4634981B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  The slot machine generally includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of identification information drawn on the outer periphery, and each reel starts to rotate by operating a start lever. Further, when the player operates a stop button provided corresponding to each reel, the rotation is stopped within a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing. A winning is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped.

  In addition, in order for a winning determined for each slot machine to occur, the winning flag must be set by winning the internal lottery performed in advance (usually at the start operation) (although other conditions are not met) May be added). In other words, the occurrence of winning in the slot machine is determined by at least an element that depends on the chance of setting a winning flag and an element that is not affected by the chance of stopping at a timing at which a display result corresponding to the winning can be derived. It will be.

  By the way, even if the rotation of each reel constituting the variable display device is stopped by a stop operation by the player, if it is kept rotating from the start operation, it is practical even if the player is playing a game. It is not possible to obtain a sufficient operating rate. Therefore, in the conventional slot machine, when the elapsed time after the predetermined condition is satisfied after the reel starts to rotate reaches a predetermined time, the reel is not yet stopped and is still rotating. The reel is regarded as having been stopped and its rotation is forcibly stopped.

  However, because the reel rotation was forcibly stopped over time as if the stop button had been operated, the display result corresponding to the winning with the winning flag set is the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed. If the timing is such that the player can derivation, a winning may occur even if the player does not stop the game himself / herself. This was not a favorable state for the purpose of ensuring the suppression of shooting characteristics by suppressing the occurrence of winning due to chance by the technical intervention of the player.

  For this reason, when the reel rotation is forcibly stopped over time, that is, when it is automatically stopped, even if a specific prize is won by internal lottery, the display result corresponding to the loss is always displayed on the variable display device. As a result, a slot machine that is controlled to be derived has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-31466 A

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, any winning is won by internal lottery, and when the reel rotation is automatically stopped over time, the winning that is won by the internal lottery due to malfunction. Even if a combination of is stopped, that is, if a winning that should not be won is generated, the winning combination of the stopped combination is a winning winning by internal lottery and will be processed as a normal winning, so the game There was a risk that the fairness of this would be impaired.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and it is intended to provide a slot machine capable of achieving fairness of the game in the case of automatically deriving display results other than winning a prize at the time of automatic stop. Objective.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C) capable of deriving and displaying display results in a plurality of variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be individually identified 2R),
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is finished and a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (reset / setting switch 36), one of the allowable stages (set values) among a plurality of types of allowable stages (setting values) in which the percentage of winning (allowance probability) is different is determined. An allowable stage selection means (setting change process by the CPU 41a) for selecting
The permissible step setting means (CPU 41a in the setting change process) sets the data indicating the permissible step selected by the permissible step selection means in the permissible step storage area (set value work) assigned to the storage area of the data storage means. Store the confirmed set value in the set value work)
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the data indicating the allowable stage stored in the allowable stage storage area (the set value stored in the set value work) is read and read. Pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not to allow the generation of a prize at a rate corresponding to the allowable stage indicated by the data,
Respective derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Timing start means (a process of setting an automatic stop time and starting timing) based on the fact that a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game is satisfied (reel rotation start);
When the derivation operation means is operated at a stage before a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the time measurement start means starts measuring time (after the reel rotation starts, before the automatic stop time elapses) A control pattern according to the determination result of the pre-determining means (reel stop control by the stop control table generated based on the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery) Based on the above, an operation time derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means (the reel is stopped at the stop position corresponding to the stop operation position with reference to the stop control table) Control), and
All the variable display areas are derived when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement start means has started timing (when there is a reel that is still changing when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel rotation has started). Automatic derivation control means for controlling the derivation of the display result to the variable display area that is still changing so that the combination of the display results does not constitute a winning combination at the time of being played (no winning line is available for any winning line) Control to stop the reel)
After display results are derived in all variable display areas (left reel, middle reel, right reel), n (n is an integer of 2 or more) winning lines (L1 to L5) straddling all the variable display areas A winning determination means (a winning determination process by the CPU 41a) for determining whether or not a winning is made according to a combination of symbols stopped in each of the
When the control for deriving the display result to the variable display area is performed by the automatic derivation control means (when the reel is stopped by automatic stop), the progress of the game is progressed when the winning determination means determines that the winning is achieved. Disabling means for disabling (the CPU 41a controls to an abnormal winning error state when it is determined that any combination is on the winning line at the time of automatic stop);
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game Disabling cancellation means (when the CPU 41a shifts to the abnormal winning error state, the setting value is newly selected and set by the setting change process to return to the game process);
With
The operation time derivation control means has a specific order (stop order in which the left reel is the first stop) in the game in which it is determined by the prior determination means that the specific winning (bell, replay) is allowed to occur. When a display result is derived in the variable display area, a first control pattern (a winning line L1 to a winning line L1) in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning can be arranged on any winning line of the n winning lines. Control of deriving the display result in the variable display area based on a stop control table that can provide a combination of “bell” and “replay” in any winning line of L5, and other than the specific order When the display result is derived in the variable display area in order, m (m is an integer) predetermined specific winning lines (m is an integer) smaller than the n winning lines (n is an integer). The second control pattern in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning can be arranged only on L1 in the case of Le and L2 or L5 in the case of Replay (in the case of Bell, the combination of “Bell” only on the winning line L1) Display control in the variable display area based on the stop control table of reels with the stop control table, and in the case of replay, the reel control by the stop control table with the combination of “replay” only in the winning line L2 or L5. Control
The automatic derivation control means has a function other than the specific order when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses in a state where at least two or more variable display areas are still fluctuating after the timing start means starts timing. The display result is derived in the variable display area in a predetermined order (when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, an automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, and changes in the order of right, middle, and left. For the variable display area other than the final variable display area (the reel other than the final stop reel) from which the display result is finally derived, the control pattern corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means is used. Control for deriving the display result of the variable display area based on the reel (the stop control table generated based on the data creation table corresponding to the result of the internal lottery The final variable display area (final stop reel) is not based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the predetermining means, and the display result of all the variable display areas is derived. Performs control to derive display results in which the combination does not constitute a winning combination (control to stop the last stop reel that is fluctuating at a stopping position where no winning line is available regardless of the result of the internal lottery) ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control for deriving the display result to the variable display area is performed because a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the derivation operation means (hereinafter also referred to as automatic stop). Even if the occurrence of any winning is permitted by the predetermining means, the display result combination is displayed so that the combination of the display results does not constitute a winning, that is, the combination of loses, when all the variable display areas are derived. Since the result is derived, it is possible to prevent a prize from being generated only by the contingency factor, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.
In addition, except for the variable display area where the display result is finally derived, control is performed according to the determination result of the pre-decision means regardless of whether the stop operation means is operated or automatic stop. Since the control is performed so that only the variable display area from which the display result is derived at the end does not constitute a combination that does not constitute a winning combination, the stop operation means has been operated except for the variable display area from which the display result is finally derived. Regardless of whether it is automatic stop or not, it is only necessary to perform control to derive the display result in the variable display area based on a common control pattern. Even when is added, the reel stop control is not complicated.
In addition, when the automatic stop is performed, it is instructed to derive the display results in a different order from the specific order. Therefore, when the automatic stop is performed in a state where a specific winning is permitted, the final variable display Except for areas, the combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winnings that are allowed is controlled so that only the specific winning line among the multiple winning lines is aligned, so automatic stop when the specific winnings are allowed In the case of performing, the symbols corresponding to the specific winnings are stopped on the specific winning line in the variable display areas other than the final variable display area, and the symbols corresponding to the specific winnings are stopped in the final variable display area. The display mode is such that the symbols corresponding to the specific winning are not arranged on the specific winning line. As a result, even if an automatic stop is performed in a state where a specific winning is permitted, whether or not it is derived from the display mode in accordance with the automatic stop in a state where the specific winning is permitted It becomes possible to discriminate.
Further, the control for deriving the display result in the variable display area by automatic stop is performed, and after stopping in all the variable display areas, the combination of the display results derived in the variable display area is a combination that constitutes a prize If it is judged, that is, if a prize is generated due to malfunction due to an abnormality despite automatic stop, the progress of the game will be disabled, so there was a prize that should not be won. Even in such a case, it is not processed as a normal winning, and the fairness of the game is not impaired.
Further, when it is determined that the combination of the display results derived in the variable display area by the automatic stop is a combination for fair winning, and the progress of the game is disabled, an allowable stage is determined based on the operation of the setting operation means. Unless the (setting value) is newly selected and set, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled is not released. In other words, if a winning occurs due to a malfunction despite the automatic stop, there is a high possibility that some kind of data abnormality has occurred. In such a case, an allowable stage set automatically by the slot machine. Rather, the permissible stage selected and set based on the operation of the setting operation means (generally, since the operation of the setting operation means is operated by the employee of the amusement shop, it is the permissible stage selected by the amusement shop side) Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the above, it is possible to further improve the fairness of the game.
Note that the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or setting a maximum bet number. good. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the predetermined timing start condition for the timing start means to start timing may be any condition that is satisfied after the game starts. For example, when the game start operation is performed, the change of the variable display area starts. When the operation of the stop operation means becomes valid after the start of the change of the variable display area, when the operation of the stop operation means invalidated with the stop operation becomes valid again, the stop operation means is finally operated When it is done.
In addition, the automatic derivation control means is a combination in which a combination of display results does not constitute a winning when all the variable display areas are derived when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement start means starts timing. In order to obtain a display result in a variable display area that is still changing, the derivation operation means is operated before the predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed. If the display result has already been derived in the variable display area and a winning is achieved by the display result already derived (for example, a winning is achieved by the display result of any one of the variable display areas) Not as long.

A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1,
The operation time derivation control means (reel stop control based on the stop operation) is performed when it is determined by the predetermination means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) that a special winning advantageous to the player is permitted (whichever When the special combination is won), the display mode is different from the combination of the display results corresponding to the special prize, and it is determined by the pre-determining means that the special prize is allowed to occur. A control pattern (a display of the left reel) that is a combination that is not derived when there is not, and that is capable of deriving a predetermined combination (reach eyes) indicating that the occurrence of the special prize is determined to be permitted As a result, "Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7" of the 16th to 18th designs, and "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the 20, 21, 1st designs or the 12th to 14th designs. Based on the stop control of the reel by the stop control table for stopping the display mode in which none of the winnings are aligned on the winning line, and stopping the display mode in which no winning is aligned on the winning line) While performing control to derive the display result to the variable display area (left reel, middle reel, right reel),
In the slot machine, when the display result is derived in the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means (reel stop control based on the elapse of the automatic stop time) (reel to stop last among the reel stop commands indicating automatic stop). When the reel stop command is received), even if the combination of the display results of the variable display area is a predetermined combination, it does not indicate that it is determined that the special winning is permitted. Display result invalid notification means (notification pattern at the time of automatic stop by the CPU 91a) for notifying that the chance eyes and the reach eyes are invalid even if the reach eyes and the chance eyes are stopped because the reel is stopped by the automatic stop control. Production control based on
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a predetermined combination (so-called reach eye) is accidentally derived by automatic stop, it is notified that the combination is invalid. Can prevent misunderstanding.
A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 2,
Before the display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas, the fact that it is determined by the pre-decision means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) that one of the winnings is permitted (small role announcement) Winning allowance notification means (effect control by the CPU 91a) for notifying the effect),
When a display result is derived in the variable display area (left reel, middle reel, right reel) by the automatic derivation control means (reel stop control based on the passage of automatic stop time) (of the reel stop command indicating automatic stop) When receiving a reel stop command for the last reel to be stopped), the winning allowance notification invalid notifying means (CPU 91a) for notifying that the notification by the winning allowance notifying means is invalid (that the small role notification effect is invalid). Production control based on the automatic stop notification pattern by)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the winning allowance notification is performed, it is notified that the winning allowance notification is invalid even if the notified winning is not generated due to the automatic stop. It is possible to prevent misunderstandings.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 ,
The pre-determining means (internal lottery by the CPU 41a) generates a prize including a special prize (cherry) that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one specific variable display area (left reel). Decide whether to allow,
The automatic derivation control means, when the automatic stop time has passed in a state where two or more variable display areas including at least the specific variable display area are still fluctuating after the timing start means starts timing, Control is performed to derive a display result in which a combination of display results does not constitute a winning combination when all variable display areas are derived in a predetermined order with a specific variable display area as the last (reel When the automatic stop time has elapsed after the start of rotation, control is performed to stop the moving reel in the order of right, middle, and left)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the automatic stop is performed in a state where a special winning that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one of the specific variable display areas is performed, the final variable display area is displayed. Even if the control patterns of the variable display areas other than the above are shared, the combination corresponding to the special prize can be removed.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 ,
Derivation operation invalidating the operation of the derivation operation means during a period from when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement start means starts timing until the display results are derived in at least all variable display areas And a means for disabling the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R after setting the automatic stop flag in the RAM 41c.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the operation of the derivation operation means is invalidated during the period from when the automatic stop is started until the display results are derived to at least all the variable display areas, the derived display results It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by whether the player is caused by a stop operation by the player or by an automatic stop.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. A slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and a side end of the housing. It consists of a pivoted front door.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “blue 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “BAR”, “replay”, A plurality of types of mutually distinguishable symbols such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, and “bell” are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state described later) 3 is a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a regular bonus to be described later, 1), and the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bets are settled (for setting credits and bets). The payout switch 10 operated when the medal used is returned), the start switch 7 operated when starting the game, the reels 2L, 2C, 2 Stop switch 8L is operated to each stop of the rotation, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  Further, inside the front door, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for canceling an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, changing a set value described later And a set value indicator 24 for displaying the set value at that time during confirmation of the set value, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, is provided in a hopper tank (not shown). ) Side or medal payout outlet 9 side, a flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching, and a medal insertion sensor 31 for detecting a medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowing down to the hopper tank side are provided. ing.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, automatic selection for enabling / disabling the automatic settlement function for controlling automatic settlement at the end of the big bonus, which will be described later (processing to settle (return) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) It functions as a settlement switch 29, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change mode at startup, and a reset switch for releasing an error state and a stop state except for a RAM abnormality error in a normal state. Reset / setting that functions as a setting switch to change the set value of the winning probability (outtake rate) of the internal lottery Switch 38, the power switch 39 is provided which is operated to ON / OFF the power.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the prescribed number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, and one is determined in the regular bonus described later. When medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the one-BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel sensor 33 described above. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, automatic settlement switch 29, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection of these connected switches is detected. A signal is input.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. A power failure detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not input, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set in either an interrupt mode for generating an external interrupt in accordance with the timer mode or an interrupt mode for generating an internal interrupt in accordance with the number of clock inputs to the CPU 41a.

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. Further, the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment), and performs a timer interruption process (main) described later. Execute. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. The data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU 41a acquires the state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 at the time of start-up, and sets the stop function valid / invalid and the automatic checkout function valid / invalid in a specific register of the CPU 41a. It has become. The state of the stop switch 36 and the automatic checkout switch 29 is acquired only at the time of activation, and the stop / automatic checkout function is enabled / disabled based on the acquired state. Even if the switch 29 is operated, the validity / invalidity of the stoppage and automatic settlement function is not newly set.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 16383 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating a numerical value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt process (main), and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for production, mounted on production control board 90 Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. The CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) to be described later by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the operation is further performed from the setting 6, the setting is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, a power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 In addition to storing specific data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but when the RAM parity is not 0 (in the case of 1) or for destructive diagnosis If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not the bet number set in the internal lottery process described later is a bet number according to the gaming state, and whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is an appropriate value. judge.

  Even when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus and a normal gaming state as gaming states. Among these, 1 is set as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus, and a bet corresponding to the normal gaming state is set. 3 is defined as the prescribed number. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, the game can be started when the betting number is set to 1, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the game is started when the betting number is set to 3. Can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 1, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 1 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number is 3 according to the gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of the winning flags for each of these combinations, the winning flag for the small role and the re-playing role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes.

  FIG. 4A shows the winning combination table. The winning combination table is stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, and the combination numbers (1 to 14) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to combinations of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal drawing. ) Is registered.

  In the slot machine 1, as a special role, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a regular bonus, a cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell as a small role are replayed. Replay is defined as a role. In addition, combinations of combinations in the slot machine 1 include big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus (1) +1 (1), big bonus (2) +1 (1), Big bonus (1) +1 (2) and big bonus (2) +1 (2) are defined. That is, the total of the combination of combinations and combinations is 14.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a regular bonus. . Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, it depends on whether any special role is being carried over (whether any special role has already been set in the winning flag of the special role). The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to lottery are also different. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “1” is set as the state number, and “2” is set as the state number in the case of a regular bonus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, ie all roles and combinations of roles are internal lottery It becomes the object of. When the game state is the normal game state and any special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 The sheet (2), the bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 10 is the target of the internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, cherry, one piece (1), one piece (2), bell, that is, the combination of the combination and combination after the combination number 11 The combination is subject to internal lottery.

  Cherry is awarded when the “Cherry” symbol is derived on one of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and two medals are paid out in the normal gaming state. 15 medals are paid out. If the “Cherry” symbol stops at the upper or lower level of the left reel, the combination of cherries will be aligned on the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5. Since you won the cherry on the winning line, 4 medals will be paid out in the normal gaming state, but in the regular bonus, even if you win the cherry on the 2 winning lines, one game Since the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at 15 is set to 15, only 15 medals are paid out. One (1) is awarded when the combination of “Blue 7-Red 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. One (2) is awarded when the combination of “Red 7-Blue 7-Watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out in the normal gaming state. In the regular bonus, 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and in the normal gaming state, 8 medals are paid out. 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When a replay is won, the medals will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets no longer required to be set in the next game (the regular bonus will not be replayed and will always be 3) This is substantially the same as when three corresponding medals are paid out.

  The regular bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-BAR” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the regular bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the regular bonus. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. While the game state is in the regular bonus, the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The big bonus is awarded when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” or a combination of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state. When the big bonus is won, the gaming state shifts to the big bonus. When transitioning to the big bonus, the transition to the regular bonus is performed at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. Controlled by regular bonus. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus reaches 466. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the game state is the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  When it is necessary to distinguish between the big bonus by “red 7-red 7-red 7” and the big bonus by “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”, the big bonus (1) and the big bonus (2 ). Further, the regular bonus, the big bonus (1), and the big bonus (2) described above may be simply referred to as “bonus”.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are drawn exclusively.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state are referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination numbers 1 to 14 is referred to. And combinations of combinations, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 1], big bonus (2) [port number 2], regular bonus [port number 3], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 4], big Bonus (2) + cherry [role number 5], big bonus (1) +1 (1) [role 6], big bonus (2) +1 (1) [role 7], big bonus (1) +1 Sheet (2) [Role No. 8], Big Bonus (2) +1 (2) [Role No. 9], Replay [Role No. 10], Cherry [Role No. 11], 1 (1) [Role No. 12] 1 sheet (2) [role number 13], Le [winning number 14 are sequentially read as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, the winning combination table is referred to, 14 roles and combinations of roles, that is, replay [role number 10], cherry [role number 11], 1 sheet (1) [role number 12], 1 sheet (2) [role number 13], bell [role number 14 ] Are sequentially read out as a target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 11 to 14, that is, cherry [portion number 11]. 1 sheet (1) [port number 12], 1 sheet (2) [port number 13], and bell [port number 14] are sequentially read out as the internal lottery target roles.

  In the internal lottery, when the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles and the state number indicating the current gaming state are added to the random number for internal lottery, and the result of the addition overflows In addition, it is determined that the combination or combination of combinations is won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be selected is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c. Set. The internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) consists of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is general. It is assigned as a general role storage work in which the winning flag of the role is set. Specifically, when any of the roles (special roles) of the role numbers 1 to 3 is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, and the general role is stored. Clear the winning flag set for the workpiece. In addition, when any of the role numbers 4 to 9 (special role + general role) is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storing work, A winning combination flag indicating that the general combination has been won is set in the general combination storing work. If any of the combination numbers 10 to 14 (general combination) is won, a general combination winning flag indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination or winning combination is won, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  The number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the role-specific table stored in advance in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role table, as shown in FIG. 4B, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, big bonus ( 1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 (1) One (2), the storage address of the number of determination values of the bell is registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Regular Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 ( 1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2) are the roles that are subject to internal lottery when no special roles are carried over in the normal gaming state The storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0 is registered. For the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus, the common flag is 0, and the storage address of the determination value number is individually registered according to the set value. Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big For bonus (2) +1 (2), the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Replay is a combination that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry, 1 (1), 2 (2) are roles that are subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, and correspond to the storage address of the number of judgment values corresponding to state number 0 and state number 1 A storage address for the number of determination values to be stored and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state number 2 are registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is subject to internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 1, and the state number 2 And the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to each are registered. The common flag for this combination is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. However, only the cherry, which is a small role, 1 (1), 1 (2), and a bell, is a target for paying out medals when winning a prize. These small roles can be awarded in any gaming state, but when the state number is 2, that is, when the gaming state is a regular bonus, when the state number is 0, that is, the gaming state More medals are paid out than when the player is in the normal gaming state. In addition, when “cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the combination of cherries is aligned on the two pay lines as described above, so the total number of payouts is paid out. It will be. In this embodiment, since the number of cherries paid out is 2 in the normal gaming state, 4 medals are paid out. In the regular bonus, the number of cherries paid out is 15, but the total number exceeds the upper limit of 15, so in this case, 15 medals are paid out.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the regular bonus winning are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for paying out medals. The replay does not involve the payout of medals, but it is substantially the same as the payout of 3 medals since it is not necessary to insert medals used for setting the bet amount in the next game (always the normal gaming state).

  FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, when the address ADD is a game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 1. This is an address to be referred to, and at this time, 15 which is the value stored here is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of state number 0. . Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are addresses that are referred to when the internal lottery target role is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 0. It is. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a regular bonus and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively, in the game state of state number 0.

  Regarding the big bonus (1) and big bonus (2) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. In addition, since different numbers of determination values are stored, the winning probabilities of these combinations and combinations of combinations differ depending on the set values.

  On the other hand, for the regular bonus in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. Since the number of determination values is stored, the regular bonus winning probability is the same for any set value.

  In addition, the address ADD + 36 is set to the set value when the internal lottery target role is big bonus (1) + cherry in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special role is carried over. Regardless of the address to be referred to, the address ADD + 38 is the big bonus (2) + in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. This address is referred to regardless of the set value when it is a cherry, and the address ADD + 40 is an object of the internal lottery in the game state of the state number 0, that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal game state This address is referenced regardless of the setting value when the winning combination is a big bonus (1) + 1 (1) The address ADD + 42 is a set value when the internal lottery target role is a big bonus (2) +1 (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in a state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state Regardless of the address that is referenced, the address ADD + 44 is a big bonus (1) in the game state of state number 0, that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. +1 (2) is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value, and the address ADD + 46 is state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state, This address is referred to regardless of the set value when the target for internal lottery is Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2)

  The address ADD + 48 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 0 and the state number is 1, that is, in the normal game state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  The address ADD + 50 is referred to regardless of the set value when the target number of the internal lottery is cherry in the state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Address. The address ADD + 52 is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry. Address. The address ADD + 54 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the target part of the internal lottery is cherry.

  The address ADD + 56 is irrespective of the set value when the state number is 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and when the number of target combination for internal lottery is one (1). This address is referred to by The address ADD + 58 is related to the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and the number of target combination of internal lottery is one (1). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 60 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of target combination of internal lottery is one (1).

  The address ADD + 62 is set regardless of the set value when the number of the target combination of the internal lottery is one (2) in the state number 0, that is, in the gaming state in which no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. This address is referred to by The address ADD + 64 is related to the set value when the state number is 1, that is, in the gaming state in which any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is one (2). This address is referred to without The address ADD + 66 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the state number is 2, that is, in the regular bonus, when the number of target characters for internal lottery is one (2).

  Addresses ADD + 68, ADD + 70, ADD + 72, ADD + 74, ADD + 76, and ADD + 78 are in the gaming state of state number 0 and state number 1, that is, in the normal gaming state, and the target role of the internal lottery is Bell and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively. This address is referred to by The addresses ADD + 80, ADD + 82, ADD + 84, ADD + 86, ADD + 88, and ADD + 90 are addresses that are referred to when the target role of the internal lottery is the bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of state number 2, that is, the regular bonus. It is. Regarding the bell in the gaming state of state number 2, the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the number of determination values of setting values 1 and 2, the number of determination values of 3 and 4, 5 and 6 Since the common determination value number is stored in each of the determination value numbers, the winning probabilities of the setting values 1 and 2 are the same, the winning probabilities of the 3 and 4 are common.

  FIGS. 6A to 6C are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between the value of a random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. FIG. 6 (a) shows that no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 6 (b) shows a case where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Here are some examples of regular bonuses. 6A to 6C show an example in which the set value is 6. FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 6 (a), when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the regular bonus, the big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay, Cherry, 1 sheet (1), 1 sheet (2), Bell is subject to internal lottery. 10, 5, 5, 5, 5, 2245, 76, 153, 153, 2082. First, the big bonus (1) subject to the internal lottery is determined by adding the judgment value number of 20 and the result of addition overflows when 16364 to 16383 are acquired as random numbers for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) that is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 40, which is the sum of the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 20 of the big bonus (2). The winning combination is obtained when 16344 to 16363, which will overflow, are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery. Similarly, the regular bonus is a big bonus when 16313 to 16343 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 16303 to 1631 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 16293-16302 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1) is acquired when 16288-16292 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery , Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), 16283 to 16287 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), random numbers for internal lottery are 16278 to 16282 As a big bonus (2) + 1 (2), 16273-16277 are random numbers for internal lottery The replay is acquired when 14028-16272 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the cherry is 1 (1) when 13952-14027 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. ) When 13799 to 13951 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, 1 (2) is when 11646 to 13798 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, When it is acquired as a random number for lottery, it is determined that each is a win. When 0 to 11563 are obtained as random numbers for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) +1 (1), Big Bonus (2) +1 (1), Big Bonus (1) +1 (2), Big Bonus (2) +1 (2), Replay , Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 528.5, 1/1638, 1/1638, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1/3277, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 215.6, 1 / 107.1, 1 / 107.1, and 1 / 7.87.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6B, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are inside. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 2245, 96, 163, 163, 2082 at the set value 6, it is 14139-16383, 14043-14138, 13880-14042, 13717-13879, 11635. When ˜13716 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, each is determined to be a winner. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 7.87. When 0-11634 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the regular bonus, only the cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), and bell are subject to internal lottery. Since the determination value numbers are 96, 163, 163, and 15919, when 16288 to 16383, 16125 to 16287, 15962 to 16124, and 43 to 15961 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 170.7, 1 / 100.5, 1 / 100.5, and 1 / 1.03. When 0 to 55823 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all the combinations are lost.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The CPU 41a refers to the table index and table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the reel starts rotating and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the table index contains table creation data from the reference address (table_index) when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state). The difference up to the address where the index data indicating the head address of the stored area is stored is registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address (table_index).

  Specifically, Loss, Cherry, 1 (1), 1 (2), Bell, Replay, Big Bonus (1) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (1) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (1) + Bell, Big Bonus (1) + Replay, Big Bonus (2) (+ Loss), Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + 1 (1), Big Bonus (2) + 1 (2), Big Bonus (2) + Bell, Big Bonus (2) + Replay, Regular Bonus (+ Loss), Regular Bonus + Cherry, Regular Bonus + 1 (1), Regular Bonus + 1 (2), Regular Bonus + Bell, Regular Bonus + Replay Index data indicating the leading address of the formation data is stored area is stored. Even if the winning status of the combination is different, if the same control is applied (for example, big bonus (1) + replay winning, big bonus (2) + replay winning, regular bonus + replay winning In the case of applying the same control, etc., the same address is stored as index data. In such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Will be.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven in 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. As shown in FIG. 8, 21 areas (frames) divided into 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one rotation of the reel. Area numbers 1 to 21 from the position are assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number) located in the lower symbol area of the fluoroscopic window 3. It is a table in which the number of sliding frames when detected is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Further, when any one reel stops or any two reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of reel rotation, that is, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stop control table address of the unreacted reel corresponding to the stopped reel and the area number of the stop position of the reel is obtained from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is expanded to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is obtained by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, an area (stop point in the figure) corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area (stop operation point in the figure) corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position in which the stop operation is detected. It stops at the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the lower symbol area of the see-through window 3).

  The table index of this embodiment stores only one address as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state. Furthermore, one table creation data includes one table data. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of up to 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In the table index, the number of sliding frames that draws the winning combination as much as possible within the range of 4 frames to the address corresponding to the case where one of the roles is won, and draws the winning combination so that there are no winning combinations. The index data that identifies the data for creating the table for which is defined is stored, and for the table creation in which the number of sliding frames to be drawn so that none of the roles are aligned is stored in the address corresponding to the case where the loss is won Stores index data for specifying data. For this reason, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, and the number of sliding symbols to be drawn so that the winning combinations are not aligned is determined. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames that do not have any winning combination is defined is created, and the reel stopping control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align and stop this, The symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of up to 4 frames.

  Also, in the table index, the address corresponding to the case where a small role is elected with a special role carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (1) + Bell, etc.) The number of sliding frames is determined so that the selected special role can be drawn to the maximum within the range of 4 frames, and the stop operation position where the selected special role cannot be drawn within the range of the maximum 4 frames is selected. The index data for specifying the data for creating the table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so that the maximum number of frames is drawn in the range of 4 frames is stored, and the reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if it is possible to align and stop the symbols of the special roles that have been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, the control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't draw a special role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  Also, in the table index, when the re-game player is elected in the state where the special game has been carried over from before the previous game (Big Bonus (1) + Replay, etc.), the re-game player has 4 frames. Index data for specifying data for creating a table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to be pulled in as much as possible within the range is stored, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when the winning flag for the bell and the replay is set, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player.

  In addition, when the replay winning flag is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Replay” symbol must be used as a stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. When a stop control table for drawing on L2 or L5 is created, and the “replay” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel or the right reel, the stop control table for the left reel is 5 The “replay” symbol of the number, that is, when the symbol is stopped on the winning line L2 or L5, the “replay” symbol excluding the “replay” symbol that also stops the “cherry” on the winning line L1. A stop control table is created to draw on the winning line L2 or L5, and the middle reel and right reel are moved from the left reel. When stopped first, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5, and when the left reel is stopped thereafter, the “replay” symbol other than No. 5 is always placed on the winning line L2 or L5. Therefore, for example, when the “replay” symbol of No. 5 stops on the winning line L2 or L5 of the middle reel and the right reel, the replay and the cherry are not won simultaneously. In the left reel, the 2nd “Replay” design and the 7th “Replay” design are arranged within 4 frames, so even if control is performed to avoid the 5th “Replay” design, Regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, the replay can always be won. If the left reel stop operation is performed when the replay winning flag is set and all reels are still rotating, except for the case where the replay and cherry win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “replay” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is first stopped, control is performed so that the combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  In addition, when the winning flag for the bell is set, if the left reel is still rotating, the “Bell” symbol must be used as the stop control table for the middle reel and the right reel. A stop control table is drawn in on L1, and when the “bell” symbol is stopped on at least one winning line L1 of the middle reel or the right reel, the “bell” symbol is used as the stop control table for the left reel. A stop control table for drawing on the winning line L1 in the drawing range of 4 frames is created, and when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1, Thereafter, when the left reel is stopped, the “bell” symbol is always drawn on the winning line L1. In the left reel, the “bell” symbol and the “cherry” symbol are not arranged continuously. For this reason, the bell can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R by the player, and the bell and the cherry are not simultaneously won. If the left reel stop operation is performed when the bell winning flag is set and all reels are still rotating, the bell and cherry will win at the same time, A stop control table for drawing the “bell” symbol into any of the pay lines L1 to L5 within the drawing range of 4 frames is created. That is, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, control is performed so that the combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5.

  Next, chance eyes and reach eyes will be described. The chance in the present embodiment is a display mode that can be derived when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1) or one (2) is won. In this embodiment, the display result of the left reel is “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, or “Bell Red 7 Bell” of No. 8-10, “Replay of No. 15-17 "Blue 7 Watermelon" stops and no display of the winning lines is on the winning line. As a result of displaying the middle reel, "Cherry Replay Cherry" of No. 11-13, 21, 1, 2 The “Cherry Bell Cherry” of the design stops, and the display mode in which none of the roles are aligned on the winning line and the display result of the right reel are “Replay Cherry Blue 7” of the 10th to 12th designs. Stop and any Have applied the display mode also not aligned on a winning line as a chance eyes.

  The reach eye is a display mode that can be derived only when any bonus (big bonus (1), big bonus (2), regular bonus) is won in the normal gaming state. As a result of the display on the left reel, the display mode in which “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16-18 is stopped is the reach of all bonuses, and symbols 20, 20, 1, 1 or 12-14 The display mode in which the symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” has stopped and none of the roles are on the winning line is applied as the reach of the big bonus (1) or regular bonus.

  Further, in this embodiment, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, or when one (1), one (2) is won, each reel 2L, 2C, 2R Regardless of the order in which the stop operations are performed, it is controlled so that chances can be derived, and when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed. Regardless of the order in which they are performed, the reach is controlled so that it can be derived, provided that each reel is stopped in an order that satisfies a specific condition (eg, left, middle, right). You may be able to derive the chance eyes and reach eyes.

  Here, an example of reel stop control when the chance eyes and reach eyes are derived will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 8 shows a case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), and one piece (1) is won without any bonus being carried over (1 piece (1)). If none of the bonuses have been carried over and 1 (2) has been won (1 (2)), if no bonus has been carried over and the cherry has been won (Cherry), If the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won and no other role is won (BB (1) RB), the big bonus (2) is won and no other role is won It is a figure which shows the stop control table of the left reel selected in case (BB (2)).

  First, when no winning combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the stop control table corresponding to the item of losing in FIG. 8 is selected as the stop control table for the left reel. In this stop control table, “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for all area numbers, “bell / red 7 bell” of symbols 8 to 10 and “ "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon", 12-14 design "Replay Watermelon Bell", 16-18 design "Blue 7 Watermelon Blue 7", 20, 21, 1 design "Replay The number of sliding frames for which display results other than “watermelon bell” are specified is determined, and 2 to 4 are display results constituting a chance eye when a left reel stop operation is detected at any timing. In the display results that comprise the "Replay Watermelon Bell" of the number 8 symbol, the "Bell Red 7 Bell" of the 8th to 10th symbol, and the "Replay Blue 7 Watermelon" of the 15th to 17th symbol There is a 12-14 pattern "Replay Watermelon Bell" No. 6-18 symbols “Blue 7 / Watermelon / Blue 7”, 20, 21, No. 1 symbol “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” will not be derived as a display result and will eventually be a chance or reach Does not hold.

  When one (1) is won in a state where no bonuses are carried over in the normal gaming state (1 (1)), the one shown in FIG. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is selected. In this stop control table, the display result is specified in which “blue 7” constituting one (1) combination stops on any winning line for the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21. The number of sliding symbols is determined. In particular, for the region numbers 18 and 19, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. In addition, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 4 to 8, and “Bell Red 7 Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 is specified for the region numbers 10 to 14. The number of sliding frames is determined, and the number of sliding frames is specified, in which display results other than the display results including the display mode that configures the chance eyes and the reach eyes for other area numbers are specified.

  Therefore, the timings of the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21, that is, the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any winning line. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected at a possible timing, a display result in which the “blue 7” symbols constituting one (1) combination stop on any winning line is derived. In particular, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timings of the area numbers 18 and 19 among the timings at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be drawn in the range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 15th to 17th symbols “Replay Blue 7 Watermelon” are derived, and if one (1) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the region numbers 4 to 8 among the timings at which the “blue 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result, and a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 10 to 14, “bell bell” of symbols 8 to 10 is detected. “Red 7 Bell” is derived as a display result, and in these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, a chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (1) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) where the number of sliding symbols specifying “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2-4 and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of symbols 8-10 are determined. Is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of sliding symbols for which the display result of “Blue 7” stopping on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (1) has been won, a higher rate than the display result in which “blue 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (1) stops on any winning line is derived, Chance eyes Among the displayed results, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) cannot be won. "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" will be derived.

  When one (2) is won (1 (2)) in a state where no bonus has been carried over in the normal gaming state, the one shown in FIG. 8 (2) is used as the stop control table for the left reel. The stop control table corresponding to the item of) is selected. In this stop control table, the number of sliding frames for specifying the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of one (2) stops on any winning line is specified for the area numbers 9 to 15. In particular, for the region numbers 12 and 13, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “bell, red 7, bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols is determined. In addition, “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is specified for the region numbers 6 to 8, and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the symbols 15 to 17 is specified for the region numbers 17 to 21. The number of sliding frames is determined, and the number of sliding frames is determined for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode that configures the chance and reach for other area numbers.

  Therefore, the timing of the area numbers 9 to 15, that is, the timing at which the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be drawn in a range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on any of the winning lines. When a stop operation of the left reel is detected, a display result is derived in which the “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination stop on any winning line. In particular, when a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol can be drawn in a range of up to 4 frames and stopped on any of the pay lines The 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” are derived, and if one (2) combination is not completed on the winning line, other winning combinations will be aligned on the winning line. Since there is nothing, chances will be established. Also, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timings of the area numbers 6 to 8 among the timings at which the “red 7” symbol cannot be drawn in the range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped on the winning line, When the “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is derived as a display result and the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of area numbers 17 to 21, “replay “Blue 7 / Watermelon” is derived as the display result. In these cases, the winning combination is not finally arranged on the winning line, and therefore, the chance chance is established. In addition, even if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at any other timing, the display mode constituting the chance eyes and reach eyes is not derived as the display result, and the chance eyes and reach eyes are finally obtained. Is not true.

  In addition, among the display results constituting these chance eyes, a stop operation is detected at a timing at which “Red 7” symbol cannot be stopped on the winning line, that is, at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. Stop operation position (area number) in which the number of sliding symbols specifying “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is determined. Is larger than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) in which the number of sliding symbols for which the display result indicating that “Red 7” stops on any winning line is specified is 1 in the normal gaming state. In the case where only the sheet (2) is won, a higher rate than the display result that “red 7” constituting the combination of the sheet (2) stops on any winning line is derived, Chan Among the display results constituting the eyes, “Replay Watermelon Bell” and 15 to 17 of symbols 2 to 4 derived when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) cannot be won. The symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” will be derived.

  When the big bonus (1) or regular bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the left reel stop control table is set in the item of BB (1) RB in FIG. A corresponding stop control table is selected. In this stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 for the region numbers 6 to 8 is determined, and 8 to 10 for the region numbers 12 and 13 are determined. The number of sliding symbols in which “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the symbol design is specified is determined, and the number of sliding symbols in which “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbol No. 20, 21, and 1 is identified for the region number 17 The number of sliding symbols for identifying the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 12th to 14th symbols for the region number 16 is determined, and the “Replay Blue” for the 15th to 17th symbols for the region number 17 is defined. “7.Watermelon” is specified, and the number of sliding symbols specifying “Blue 7, Watermelon, Blue 7” of the 16th to 18th symbols for the area numbers 18 and 19 is respectively determined. For other area numbers. Eye display result other than the display results and a display mode which constitutes a is the number of sliding frames specified are defined.

  Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6 to 8, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and finally on the winning line Since there are no winning combinations, chances will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 12 and 13, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as the display result, and finally the big on the winning line If the combination of bonus (1) is not complete, no other combination will be lined up on the winning line, so a chance will be established. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and the winning combination is finally placed on the winning line. Since there is no match, chances will be established.

  In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 16, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 12 to 14 is derived as the display result, and at the timing of the area number 1, the left reel is When a stop operation is detected, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 20, 21, No. 1 is derived as a display result, and in any case, no winning combination is finally arranged on the winning line. Therefore, a reach that can appear only when the big bonus (1) or the regular bonus is won is established, and if a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18, 16-18. The symbol “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” is derived as a display result, and a reach that is common to all bonuses is established.

  When the big bonus (2) is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, the stop control corresponding to the item of BB (2) in FIG. A table is selected. In this stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for specifying “replay watermelon bell” of symbols 2 to 4 is determined for the region numbers 4 to 7, and 8 to 10 for the region numbers 12 to 14 are determined. The number of sliding symbols for identifying the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” is determined, and for the region number 17, the number of sliding symbols for identifying “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” for the symbols 15-17 is determined. The number of sliding frames for which “blue 7, watermelon, blue 7” of the symbols 16 to 18 is specified for the region numbers 19 to 21 is determined. The number of sliding symbols for specifying a display result other than the display result including the display mode constituting the eye is determined.

  Therefore, when the left reel stop operation is detected at the timing of the region numbers 4 to 7, the “replay watermelon bell” of the symbols 2 to 4 is derived as the display result, and the region numbers 12 to 14 are displayed. When the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of, the symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of Nos. 8 to 10 are derived as the display result, and the winning combination is finally aligned on the winning line. Since there is no chance, a chance is established. If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 17, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is derived as a display result, and finally a big is displayed on the winning line. If the combination of bonus (2) is not complete, no other combination will be aligned on the winning line, and the chance will be established. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area numbers 19 to 21, “blue 7 / watermelon / blue 7” of symbols 16 to 18 is derived as a display result and is common to all bonuses. The reach will be established.

  As described above, when any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, “Replay Watermelon Bell” of No. 2-4, No. of No. 8-10 A stop control table that can specify “bell / red 7 / bell”, “replay / blue 7 / watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result is selected as a stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (1) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols as the display result, and constitute one (1) combination “ Stop control table that can identify “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the “Blue 7” symbol can be stopped on the winning line. Is selected as the stop control table for the left reel.

  In addition, when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which one (2) cannot be awarded among the display results constituting the chance eye In addition, it is possible to specify “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” of symbols 2 to 4 and “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 as display results, and constitute a combination of one sheet (2). Stop control table that can identify "bell, red 7, bell" of the 8th to 10th symbols as a display result when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the "red 7" symbol can be stopped on the winning line Is selected as the stop control table for the left reel.

  As a result, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and no other combination is won, or when only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, or in the normal gaming state In this case, when only one winning combination (2) is won, reel stop control is performed based on a stop control table from which chances can be derived. In particular, when only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) cannot be stopped on the winning line, 2-4 It is possible to derive “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the symbols and “Bell, Red 7 and Bell” of the symbols 8 to 10 as the display result, and “Blue 7” constituting a combination of one (1). When the symbol can be stopped on the winning line, it becomes possible to derive “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of No. 15 to 17 as the display result, and only one (2) in the normal gaming state. When winning, if the “Red 7” symbols that make up the combination of two (2) cannot be stopped on the winning line, the “Replay Watermelon Bell”, 15-4 symbols, The 17th pattern When “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” can be derived as a display result, and the “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (2) can be stopped on the winning line, the 8th to 10th The symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” can be derived as a display result.

  In addition, when any of the roles is not won in the normal gaming state, the “replay watermelon bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols constituting the chance eye and the “bell / red 7 • bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols A stop control table that can specify display results other than “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of symbols 15 to 17 is selected as the stop control table for the left reel. Thus, when any combination is not won in the normal gaming state, the reel stop control is performed based on the stop control table that does not derive a chance.

  Also, if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state In the case where only one (2) is elected, “Replay Watermelon” of symbols 2 to 4 constituting the chance eye when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13・ "Bell" or 8-10 symbols "Bell, Red 7, Bell" are derived as display results, but if no role is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the area number 6, Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Derived Rukoto is not. That is, when the bonus or one (1), one (2) is won, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived by performing the left reel stop operation at the above timing. On the other hand, if no winning combination is won, even if the left reel is stopped at the same timing, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived.

  Next, the symbol arrangement in the left reel will be described with reference to FIG. 2. The 9th “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus, 1 (2) is the upper stage of the left reel, The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at either the middle or lower level, the combination of the big bonus (2) and the combination of one (1) number 16 and 18 The display mode (region numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18, 17-19, 18-20) in which the “Blue 7” symbol of the number stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel Each is arranged beyond the maximum drawing range of 4 frames.

  For this reason, when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 9 to 13) at which a maximum of 4 frames of the 9th “red 7” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any winning line, Pull up the 16th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line, or draw the 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames and stop it on any winning line When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be played, the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 is drawn up to 4 frames and stopped on any winning line I can't do that either. That is, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Red 7” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. The Big Bonus (1), Regular Bonus (1), 1 Sheet (in the position where the “Red 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing of the range that can be pulled in Since the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of 2) and the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and one (1) are arranged, the “red 7” symbol is arranged. "There is no stop operation position that can aim at the" blue 7 "symbol at the same time.

  In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line in the stop control table for the left reel that is selected when the big bonus (2) or one (1) is won in the normal gaming state. This is selected when the area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode to be set is determined and the big bonus (1) or regular bonus, 1 (2) are won in the normal gaming state. In the stop control table of the left reel, the “red 7” symbol is different from the region numbers 9 to 15 in which the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “red 7” symbol stops on any pay line is different. This means that there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “blue 7” symbol at the same time.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state, a display mode (No. 6 “cherry” symbols constituting a combination of cherries from which more medals are paid out than one (1) stops at any one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. Area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbols that make up a single (1) combination are on the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel. The display modes (area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) to be stopped are arranged so as to exceed four frames that are the maximum drawing range.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8, the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) where the 6th “cherry” symbol can be drawn and stopped on any of the winning lines. If done, draw up to 4 frames of the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design and stop it on one of the winning lines, or place the 16th or 18th “Blue 7” design up to 4 frames. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position (area numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21) that can be pulled in and stopped on any of the winning lines, a maximum of 4 frames of “Cherry” symbol is displayed. It cannot be pulled in and stopped on any winning line. In other words, the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line regardless of the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol can be drawn on the winning line, and the “Blue 7” symbol does not stop on the winning line. In the normal gaming state, more medals are paid out to a position where the “Cherry” symbol does not stop on the winning line no matter what timing within the range that can be drawn into Since the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the cherry combination and the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are arranged, the “Cherry” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol are arranged respectively. There is no stop operation position that can aim at the same time.

  In other words, in the stop control table for the left reel that is selected when the cherry is won in the normal gaming state, the number of frames for drawing the display mode in which the “cherry” symbol stops on one of the pay lines is determined. In the stop control table of the left reel selected when the area numbers 6 to 12 and one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, the display indicating that the “blue 7” symbol stops on any winning line Since the region numbers 1 to 3 and 16 to 21 in which the number of frames into which the mode is drawn are different are different, there is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the display pattern (area number 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and chance chance that the 6th “cherry” symbol stops at the upper, middle or lower level of the left reel The “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are arranged within the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, a stop operation position (region numbers 6 to 12) in which the number of sliding symbols for drawing the 6th “cherry” symbol at the maximum 4 frames and stopping on any winning line is determined, and The number of sliding symbols to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, which constitutes a chance at the time of winning one (1), is determined. Since the stop operation positions (region numbers 4 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 14) partially overlap, the stop operation positions (region numbers 6 to 8 and region numbers 10 to 12) are stopped. If an operation is made, if the cherries are won, the 6th “cherry” symbol will stop on one of the winning lines, and if one is won (1), the chance will be configured "Replay watermelon bell", 2 to 4 symbols, 8 to 1 "Bell red 7 Bell" turn pattern is to be stopped.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a regards that the stop operation has been performed even if the reel stop operation has not been performed when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reel rotation started. To automatically stop each reel.

  When the CPU 41a performs the automatic stop control, the CPU 41a performs control to stop with priority in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel. That is, when all the reels are rotating, control is performed to stop in the order of right, middle, and left, and when any reel has already stopped, the reels that are still rotating are set to the right, middle, Control to stop in priority in the left order. In particular, in the present embodiment, a winning combination that is achieved only by stopping “cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a winning combination that is achieved only by any one reel is determined. Except when the reel in which the winning combination is established alone is already stopped before performing, the control for stopping the reel at the end is performed.

  In addition, in the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end, refer to the stop control table of the corresponding reel as in the case of the stop operation, and respond based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, for the reel that stops last, when the stop position corresponding to each area number is immediately stopped for every area number (the number of steps belonging to each area number is stopped with a number of steps less than one symbol. A non-winning position table indicating whether or not any of the winning positions are not aligned on the winning line, and refers to the non-winning position table at regular intervals (about 2 ms). The process of repeatedly determining whether or not the area number to which the number of steps from the reference position belongs is a non-winning position is the earliest when it is determined that the area number to which the current step number belongs is a non-winning position. Control is performed to stop the reel at a stop position that can be stopped in a stage (a range of less than one frame), that is, a position where the symbol corresponding to the area number stops in the lower stage. For this reason, the last stop reel is stopped immediately without slipping more than one frame when the rotating reel reaches the non-winning position.

  The non-winning position table is set to stop the stopped reels when the two reels except the last reel are stopped after the shift to automatic stop control or when the two reels stop and shift to the automatic stop control. It is created based on the position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, when the symbols of the corresponding region numbers are stopped in the lower row based on the stop positions of the stopped reels in order from the region numbers 1 to 21, one of the winning combinations is placed on the winning line. If it is determined that no part will stop on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, the non-winning position flag is set as the non-winning position flag. When “1” is set and the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, if it is determined that any combination will stop on the winning line, “0” indicating that it is not a non-winning position. Created by performing the process of setting. If the cherry is already stopped on the left reel, it is determined whether or not a combination other than the cherry stops on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage. When it is determined that the role other than cherry does not stop on the winning line when the symbol is stopped at the lower stage, “1” indicating the non-winning position is set as the non-winning position flag, and the area number When it is determined that the combination other than the cherry is stopped on the winning line when the symbol is stopped at the lower stage, “0” indicating that it is not the non-winning position is set.

  Further, once the automatic stop control is started, the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and does not enable it until all the reels are stopped thereafter.

  As described above, when the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control, the winning combination is controlled so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line regardless of whether or not any winning combination is won in the internal lottery. The Rukoto. In addition, for the reel that stops last, the stop control of the reel is not performed based on the stop control table, but based on the smallest number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination on the winning line. Therefore, the reach eyes or chance eyes may stop, but in this case, the stopped reach eyes or chance eyes become invalid. In other words, even if the reach is stopped, if it is based on automatic stop control, it does not indicate that any special role is elected, and even if the chance is stopped, it is based on automatic stop control. If so, it does not indicate that there is a high possibility that any special role will be elected.

  The CPU 41a according to the present embodiment performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. In the abnormal winning determination, if the combination is complete despite automatic stop (excluding cherries stopped before shifting to automatic stop control), if the combination that is not won in the internal lottery is combined, the special combination and the general combination It is determined that there is an abnormal winning when all of these are arranged at the same time. If it is determined that the prize is abnormal, it is controlled to an abnormal prize error state to disable the progress of the game. The abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated as in the case of the RAM abnormal error described above. It will not be released until it is set.

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets a winning flag indicating a winning combination in the game in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and all reels are stopped. To set a winning symbol flag indicating a combination on the winning line. Then, an abnormal winning determination flag is created from the winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The winning flag is a 16-bit (2-byte) binary value indicating the winning combination in the game. Indicates that the player has won, and if it is 0, the player has not won.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus, the 11th bit is replay, and the 12th bit is One (1), thirteenth bit corresponds to one (2), fourteenth bit corresponds to bell, and fifteenth bit corresponds to cherry. The third to tenth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of winning combinations may be won in one game. In this case, the value of each bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1 in the winning flag. Yes.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each combination is 0. Indicates that the winning combination is won, and when it is 1, it indicates that the winning combination is not won. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a winning has been won, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning combination has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 10, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 3rd bit corresponds to the regular bonus. The 10th bit corresponds to replay, the 11th bit corresponds to JAC, the 12th bit corresponds to 1 (1), the 13th bit corresponds to 1 (2), the 14th bit corresponds to Bell, and the 15th bit corresponds to cherry. The third to ninth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In the abnormal winning determination, the CPU 41a first determines whether or not it is automatic stop. If it is automatic stop, the value of the 15th bit corresponding to cherry out of the 8th to 15th bits of the winning symbol flag is 1. It is determined whether the value of the other bits is 0, that is, whether the higher byte of the winning symbol flag is 80H. If the upper byte of the winning symbol flag is 80H, it is determined whether or not the cherry has stopped before shifting to automatic stop. If the cherry has not stopped before shifting to automatic stop, an abnormal winning is obtained. Is determined. That is, if the cherry stops on the winning line after shifting to automatic stop, it means that a winning has occurred despite the automatic stop, and therefore, it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. On the other hand, when the upper byte of the winning symbol flag is not 80H, it is determined whether or not each of the upper and lower bytes of the winning symbol flag is 0. judge. At the time of automatic stop, none of the roles will be aligned on the winning line except for the cherry that stopped before the automatic stop transition, and both the upper and lower bytes of the winning symbol flag should be 0. If it is not 0, it means that some winnings are aligned on the winning line, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Next, if it is not an automatic stop, or if it is not an abnormal winning at the time of automatic stop, a value obtained by performing an OR operation on each bit of the higher byte of the winning symbol and a value obtained by performing an OR operation on each bit of the lower byte , And determine whether the special combination and the general combination are won at the same time. As shown in FIG. 10, since the lower byte of the winning symbol flag is only the bit corresponding to the special combination and the upper byte is only the bit corresponding to the general combination, the value obtained by ORing the lower byte is If at least one special role has been won, it will be “1”, and if none has been won, it will be “0”. “1” if it has been won, and “0” if it has not been won. Therefore, the result of logical product of the value obtained by logical OR operation of the lower byte and the value obtained by logical OR operation of the upper byte is always “0” except when the special role and the general role are won simultaneously, If this result is “1”, it means that the special combination and the general combination are won at the same time. In this case, it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  Next, when it is determined that the special combination and the general combination are not won at the same time, it is determined whether or not the combination that is not won is prepared by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. To do. In the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination that is not won in the game in the abnormal winning determination flag is 1, and when this winning combination is not won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0. However, when the prize is won, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one winning combination is won, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. To do.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the winning of the small role and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the driving of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work that stores data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time counter. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out during the big bonus. The special work is a work that stores data that is initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting is started (before shifting to the setting change mode), 1 is stored. The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is satisfied by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. However, the in-use stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 starts from the four at the end of one game when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, and at the start. When the initialization condition is satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. All areas except the middle stack area (including the unused area and the unused stack area) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, a general work, an unused area, and an unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command indicates whether the reel to be stopped is any of the left reel, middle reel, and right reel, whether it is due to automatic stop, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the stop position of the corresponding reel. This is a command that can specify the area number, and is transmitted each time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table also includes specific commands (reel stop command indicating automatic stop, winning determination command indicating occurrence of winning, payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating end of big bonus, standby command, stop Command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are stored, and the CPU 91a is set in the game when receiving these specific commands. Regardless of the effect pattern being performed, a specific control pattern corresponding to the command is referred to, and the effect device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a reel stop command for the reel to be stopped last is received among the reel stop commands indicating automatic stop, the reel is stopped by automatic stop control. An automatic stop notification pattern for notifying that the reach is invalid and that a small role notification effect described later is invalid is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When the payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, other effects and effects accompanying payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  In addition, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 continuously executes over a plurality of games in the normal gaming state, and finally executes a continuous effect that notifies whether or not the bonus is won.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of continuous production.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 91 a continuously determines whether to execute a continuous effect according to the result of the internal lottery every time the internal winning command is received in the normal gaming state, that is, every time the internal lottery is performed. When the production lottery is executed and the continuous production lottery is won, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery, and the continuous production is performed based on the selected continuous production pattern. Execute. On the other hand, even if the continuous production lottery is not won, if the chance is stopped, one continuous production pattern is selected from a plurality of continuous production patterns according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and selected. The continuous effect is executed based on the continuous effect pattern.

  In addition, when the chance eyes are stopped during the execution of the continuous performance, the chance sales are invalidated, and the continuous performance is not newly executed. In addition, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and if the bonus is announced, the continuous effect lottery is not performed thereafter. That is, after winning one of the bonuses, the continuous effect is executed even once, and when the bonus is announced, the continuous effect is not further executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous performance is executed when the chance is derived in the normal gaming state. In addition, the continuous effect lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous effect is also executed when the continuous effect lottery is won. That is, in the normal gaming state, even if the chance is not derived, if the continuous production lottery is won, the continuous production is executed.

  Further, the CPU 91a of the effect control unit 91 performs an effect indicating that the general role is won, that is, a so-called small role notification effect when either the general role or the special role is won in the normal gaming state. It is supposed to be. Specifically, when an effect pattern for executing the small role notification effect is selected according to the result of the internal lottery, the small role notification effect is executed according to the control pattern.

  And, since the small role notification effect is performed, it is notified that either the general role or the special role is won, so even if the stop operation is performed aiming at the notified general role, If not, the special role will be elected, so a small role notification effect will be given, and if the reported general role is not prepared except when it is missed, it will be informed that the special role is elected. The Rukoto.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 12 to 21 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 12, while the game is not being executed, the setting of the bet number and the credit settlement are permitted. In this state, a medal is inserted or the bet number of credits is used. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. . If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, and there is a case where a wait is applied. At this time, the start of reel rotation waits, but the game is started as a control stage.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so the setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. In this state, Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout accompanying the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined. Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Further, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 14, when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, Is determined to be completed, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, or a BB winning effect) Only when the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. If it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the final stage, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, in the period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41 a reaches the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with the payment, the time elapsed since the end of the game is determined to be an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts during the big bonus exceeds 465 If the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 17, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout is completed, and an ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41 a reaches the ending effect stage waiting time after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set, or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, in the period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Also, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 18, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout ends. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, a period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a reaches the ending effect stage waiting time after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a is in the period until the stage wait time for the BB winning effect is reached. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying the checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 465. Therefore, in a game in which the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medals must be paid out. When the payout ends, the end of the game is determined. For example, when applying that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, in the game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied In some cases, medals are not paid out. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs a startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), and the states of the stop switch 36 and the automatic settlement switch 29 are acquired. Validity / invalidity of the stop function and automatic settlement function is set in a specific register of the CPU 41a (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption) In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 23, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error (Sb3), indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error. In the case of an error code, after initialization 1 is performed to initialize all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sb4), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is performed. To do.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sb4. Return. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormal error and the abnormal winning error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, so that the error processing is canceled. The error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated in the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error or an abnormal winning error.

  Returning to FIG. 22, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 24, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the game process is entered.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 24, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to error processing. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) are sequentially executed. When the end-time process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where the bet number can be set, sets a predetermined number of bets according to the gaming state, and executes a process of determining the bet number when the start switch 7 is operated. To do.

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not. In this internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on the respective lottery results.

  In the reel rotation process in the step of Sd3, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R detected by the player are detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed. In addition, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is automatically stopped without waiting for detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Execute the process.

  In the winning determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed.

  In the payout process in step Sd5, when it is determined that a prize is generated in step Sd4, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in the step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal gaming state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a specified number (Se5). If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, the process returns to the step of Se4, and if the value of the BET counter is the specified number, a insertion prohibition flag indicating that a medal cannot be inserted is set. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to step Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Step Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, a medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and a setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process for performing payout control of one medal is performed (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. Then, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, the insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted according to the game state of the game is read (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state and 1 in the regular bonus gaming state.

  In step Sg2, it is determined whether or not the inserted number of medals, that is, the value of the BET counter is the specified number read in step Sg1, and if the inserted number of medals is the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sg3. If the input number is not the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg3, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value stored in the set value work is an appropriate value. If the set value is in the range of 1-6, the process proceeds to step Sg5, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg4, since it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing for acquiring a random number used in the game is performed, and the process proceeds to step Sg6. In the random number acquisition process, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the latched random number value is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. A predetermined logical operation is performed on the extracted random number, and the result is obtained as a random number.

  In the step of Sg6, the state number (any of 0 to 2) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg7. In the step of Sg7, in the gaming state indicated by the state number, the first combination number to be drawn is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0, that is, when any special combination is not carried over in the normal gaming state, 1 (big bonus (1)) is first set as the combination number to be drawn. When the state number is 1, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal game state, 10 (replay) is first set as the combination number to be drawn, and the state number is 2. That is, in the case of a regular bonus, 11 (cherry) is first set as the winning number to be drawn.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number to be drawn is 15, that is, whether or not all the lots to be drawn are finished, and if it is 15, that is, all the lots to be drawn. If the lottery for the second part has been completed, the process proceeds to step Sg9. If not 15, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the general combination storing work in which the general combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Sg10, it is checked whether or not the common flag registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 4B is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If not 1, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In step Sg11, the address (see FIG. 5) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg12, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 4B in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg11 or Sg12 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, the result of addition is set as a new random number value, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg14, and the number of determination values is determined by internal lottery. It is determined whether an overflow has occurred when added to the random number value. The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In step Sg15, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 1 to 9, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination. If the combination number is 1 to 9, the step of Sg17 is performed. If the combination number is not 1 to 9, the process proceeds to step Sg18.

  In the step of Sg17, a special combination winning flag corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set in the special combination storing work in which the special combination winning flag is stored in the RAM 41c. In the step of Sg18, the general combination storing work of the RAM 41c is set. In addition, the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the combination number to be processed is set, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. In the step of Sg18, when the combination numbers are 1 to 3, since the general combination is not won, the general combination storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared in this case.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Si1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in the Si1 step, a new wait time is set (Si2).

  Next, after setting the automatic stop time (Si3), the reel motor is set to start rotating, and the reel starts rotating (Si4). Then, the process proceeds to step Si5, and it is determined whether or not an automatic stop flag indicating that automatic stop control is being performed is set in the RAM 41c. If the automatic stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Si7 and the automatic stop flag is set. If YES, the process proceeds to step Si6 to determine whether or not there is one rotating reel.

  If there is not one spinning reel in the Si6 step, that is, if two or more reels are still spinning, the process proceeds to the Si7 step. If there is one spinning reel, the process proceeds to the Si8 step.

  In step Si7, the table creation data is identified by referring to the table index, and the game status of the game, the winning combination status of the game, and the stop status of other reels are handled based on the identified table creation data. A stop control table is created for each rotating reel, and the process proceeds to step Si9.

  In the Si8 step, a non-winning position table indicating whether or not each area number is a non-winning position is created based on the stop position of the stopped reel, and the process proceeds to the Si9 step.

  In the Si9 step, a stop preparation completion code indicating that the stop preparation has been completed is set, and the process further proceeds to the Si10 step. In the timer interruption process (main), which will be described later, the constant speed rotation of the reel is performed. Wait until it is detected.

  If it is determined in step Si10 that constant rotation of the reel has been detected, the process proceeds to step Si11 to determine whether an automatic stop flag is set. If the automatic stop flag is not set, step Si12 is performed. Then, the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated, and the process proceeds to the step of Si13. On the other hand, if the automatic stop flag is set in the Si11 step, the process proceeds to the Si13 step without enabling the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

  In step Si13, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop flag is set. If the automatic stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step Si14 to perform automatic stop control, and the automatic stop flag must be set. If so, the process proceeds to Si20 step.

  In the step of Si14, it is determined whether or not there is one spinning reel. If there is one spinning reel, the process proceeds to the Si33 step. If there is not one spinning reel, that is, two or more reels. If the right reel is rotating, it is determined whether or not the right reel is rotating. If the right reel is not rotating, the process proceeds to Si16 and further whether or not the middle reel is rotating. judge.

  If the right reel is rotating in the step of Si15, the process proceeds to the step of Si18, and the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time of the reel motor corresponding to the right reel (the number of steps serving as the stop operation position) is acquired. After setting the work corresponding to the right reel, the process proceeds to step Si33, and waits until the rotation of the right reel stops.

  If the middle reel is rotating in the step of Si16, the process proceeds to the step of Si19, and the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time of the reel motor corresponding to the middle reel (the number of steps serving as the stop operation position) is obtained. After the work corresponding to the middle reel is set, the process proceeds to step Si33 and waits until the rotation of the middle reel stops.

  If the middle reel is not rotating in the step of Si16, that is, if the left reel is rotating, the process proceeds to the step of Si17, and the number of steps (stop operation position) from the reel reference position at that time of the reel motor corresponding to the left reel. Is obtained and set to the work corresponding to the left reel, the process proceeds to the step of Si33 and waits until the rotation of the left reel stops.

  Then, when the rotation of the reels stops in the step of Si33, the process proceeds to the step of Si34, and it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped. It is determined whether or not the cherry has stopped on any of the winning lines. If the cherry has not stopped on any of the winning lines on the left reel, the process returns to the Si5 step, and on any of the winning lines of the left reel. If the cherry has stopped, the process proceeds to step Si36, a cherry winning flag indicating that the cherry has won before the automatic stop is set in the RAM 41c, and the process returns to step Si5.

  If all the reels are stopped in the step of Si34, the reel rotation processing is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the Si20 step, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop time set in the Si3 step has elapsed. If the automatic stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the Si21 step. Proceed to step.

  In the Si21 step, an automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c, the process proceeds to the Si22 step, the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is invalidated, and the process returns to the Si13 step.

  In the step of Si23, it is determined whether or not the operation of any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. If any operation of the stop switch is not detected, the process proceeds to the step of Si24. If operation of the stop switch is detected, the process proceeds to step Si31.

  In the step of Si24, it is determined whether or not a reel rotation error (error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 for a certain period or more) has occurred. If no reel rotation error has occurred, Si25 is detected. If a reel rotation error has occurred, the process proceeds to step Si29.

  In the step of Si25, it is determined whether or not an insertion error (an error determined when the insertion of a medal is detected outside the period during which the insertion of a medal is permitted) has occurred, and the insertion error must have occurred. If it is determined that an input error has occurred, the process proceeds to step Si27.

  In step S26, it is determined whether or not a payout error (error determined when medal payout is detected outside the period during which medal payout is permitted) has occurred, and no payout error has occurred. If the payout error has occurred, the process proceeds to the Si27 step.

  In the step of Si27, an error code indicating an insertion / withdrawal error during reel rotation is set in the register, the process proceeds to the step of Si28, and the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si13 step again.

  In step Si29, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register, the process proceeds to step Si30, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to the Si3 step again and the reel rotation is resumed.

  In the Si31 step, the detection of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is invalidated and the process proceeds to the Si32 step, and the step from the reel reference position at that time of the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch detected in the Si23 step is performed. After obtaining the number (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel, the process proceeds to step Si33 and waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops.

  Then, when the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped in the step of Si33, the process proceeds to the step of Si34 described above, and it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped. If all the reels are not stopped, the step of Si35 is performed. Proceed to determine if the cherry is stopped on the left reel. If the cherry is not stopped on the left reel, the process returns to the Si5 step. If the cherry is stopped on the left reel, the cherry winning flag is set. Thereafter, returning to the Si5 step, if all the reels are stopped in the Si34 step, the reel rotation processing is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  The winning determination process in this embodiment is mainly composed of five processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process of determining an abnormal winning due to automatic stop based on the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process of determining whether or not the special combination and the general combination are won simultaneously based on the winning symbol flag. The fourth process is a process of determining an abnormal winning based on the winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The fifth process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sj1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sj1), and proceeds to step Sj2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout medals.

  As described above, in step Sj1, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  Subsequently, Sj2 to Sj8, which are executed, are processes for determining an abnormal winning due to automatic stop based on the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj2, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop flag is set. If the automatic stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sj9. If the automatic stop flag is set in the step of Sj2, the process proceeds to the step of Sj3 to store the value of the B register in the A register, that is, the upper 8 bits (bit corresponding to the general winning combination) of the winning symbol flag, and the step of Sj4 Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the A register is 80H, that is, whether or not the cherry is winning.

  If the value of the A register is not 80H in the step Sj4, the process proceeds to the step Sj6. If the value of the A register is 80H, the process proceeds to the step Sj5, whether or not the cherry stopped flag is set, that is, automatic stop. It is determined whether or not a cherry has been won before proceeding to Sj5. If the cherry stopped flag is set in step Sj5, the process proceeds to step Sj6. If the cherry stopped flag is not set, that is, automatic If the cherry wins after shifting to the stop, the process jumps to step Sj28.

  In step Sj6, it is determined whether the A register is not 0, that is, whether the general winning combination is won. If it is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj28, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj7.

  In the step of Sj7, the value of the C register, that is, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag (bit corresponding to the special combination) is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj8, whether the A register is not 0, that is, the special combination is It is determined whether or not a prize has been won. If it is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj28, and if it is 0, the process is terminated.

  Subsequently, Sj9 to Sj12, which are performed, are processes for determining whether or not the special combination and the general combination have won simultaneously based on the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj9, the value of the B register, that is, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag (bit corresponding to the general role) is calculated in the D register, and the result is stored. The process proceeds to step Sj10. At this time, in the D register, 1 is stored when any of the general roles has won, and 0 is stored when any of the general roles has not won.

  In step Sj10, the value of the C register, that is, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag (the bit corresponding to the special role) is calculated in the A register, and the result is stored. The process proceeds to step Sj11. At this time, in the A register, 1 is stored when any special combination has won, and 0 is stored when any special combination has not won.

  In the step of Sj11, the logical product (AND) of the value of the D register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj12. It is determined whether or not the special combination and the general combination are won at the same time. If it is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj28, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj13.

  Subsequently, Sj13 to Sj21, which are performed, are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In step Sj13, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in step Sj14, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag as the value of the L register are stored in the A register. In step Sj15, all bits of the A register are inverted. In other words, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj16.

  In the step of Sj16, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj17. It is determined whether or not the A register is not 0, that is, whether or not a special combination that has not been won has won a prize, and if it is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj28, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj18.

  In step Sj18, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj19 to invert all the bits in the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is inverted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sj20.

  In the step of Sj20, the logical product (AND) of the higher 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj21. It is determined whether the A register is not 0, that is, whether or not a general combination that has not been won has won a prize. If it is not 0, the process jumps to step Sj28, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to step Sj22.

  In the step of Sj28, in the steps of Sj4, Sj6, Sj8, Sj12, Sj17, and Sj21, when it is determined that the A register is not 0, that is, when a winning occurs at the time of automatic stop, a special role and a general role are won simultaneously. In this case, an error code indicating an abnormal winning error is set in a register as a jump destination when a winning combination in the game wins, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  The subsequent steps Sj22 to Sj29 (excluding Sj28) are processing upon winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sj22, the upper 8 bits of the winning design flag as the value of the B register are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sj23, and the lower 8 bits of the winning design flag as the value of the C register and the A register. The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sj24.

  In step Sj24, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If it is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sj25.

  In step Sj25, the value of the bit corresponding to the replay (the 11th bit) is checked against the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register. If the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sj26 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sj29, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sj27.

  In step Sj27, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a replay game in-process flag indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process is terminated.

  The step of Sj29 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sj26 that a winning combination other than the replay has been won, and a winning time process performed when a winning combination other than the replay such as calculation of the number of payouts is performed. Then, the process ends.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sj29.

  In the winning process, first, referring to the role-specific table shown in FIG. 4B, the game state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the character indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sj31). , Go to step Sj32.

  In step Sj32, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag, and if neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2) has been won. , Go to step Sj35. If the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won, the big bonus medium flag indicating that the big bonus is being set is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) ( Sj33), the process proceeds to step Sj34, the value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total payout of medals in the big bonus is stored in the RAM 41c is initialized (set to 0) (Sj34), and the process proceeds to step Sj35.

  In step Sj35, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the regular bonus has not been won in step Sj35, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the regular bonus is won in the step of Sj35, the regular bonus medium flag indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sj36). After the value of the game counter and the value of the regular bonus winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus are stored are initialized (Sj37), the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  34 and 35 are flowcharts showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  In the game end process, first, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus is being performed in the step of Sk1. In step Sk1, if the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the RB signal is ON, it is determined that the regular bonus is in effect.

  If the regular bonus is not in the step of Sk1, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the regular bonus is in the step of Sk1, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is decremented by 1, and if a winning has occurred, the value of the regular bonus medium winning counter is incremented by 1 (Sk2), and the regular bonus end condition Is determined, that is, whether the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0 or the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter is 8 (Sk3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the step of Sk3, the process proceeds to the step of Sk5. If the end condition of the regular bonus is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk4). ), Go to step Sk5.

  In step Sk5, it is determined whether or not a big bonus is in progress. In step Sk5, when the big bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c and the BB signal is ON, it is determined that the big bonus is being used.

  If the big bonus is not in the step in Sk5, the process proceeds to the step in Sk12. Is determined, that is, whether or not the value of the big bonus medium payout counter exceeds 465 (Sk7). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sk7, the process proceeds to step Sk9. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are set. Clear (Sk8) and proceed to Step Sk12.

  In step Sk9, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk9, the process proceeds to the step of Sk12. If the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk9, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sk10), and the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored are initialized. (Sk11), the process proceeds to step Sk12.

  In step Sk12, it is determined whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sk12, the process proceeds to step Sk16. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk17). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk17, that is, when the regular bonus is finished and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk13, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sk14). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk15, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk14. If not, that is, if the regular bonus is not satisfied and the termination condition of the regular bonus is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sk16. In the step of Sk15, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in the step of Sk16, the process proceeds to the step of Sk19. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sk16, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sk17), and the process waits until the output waiting time of the RB in-progress signal elapses (Sk18). When the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to the step Sk19.

  In step Sk19, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk19, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk19, whether the BB medium signal of the external output signals is in an ON state or not. Is determined (Sk20). When the BB signal is ON in the step of Sk20, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk25, and the BB is being processed in the step of Sk20 When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk21), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sk22) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sk23), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk22 elapses is performed (Sk24). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sk25.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 36, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sm1), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sm2). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sm4. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 28 is performed (Sm3), and then the process proceeds to step Sm4. . In step Sm3, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sm2, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In the step of Sk25, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the step of Sk25, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sk25, whether or not the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sk26). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sk26, that is, when the regular bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the regular bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sk28, and the RB is being processed in the step of Sk26. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sk27), and the process proceeds to step S28.

  In step Sk28, it is determined whether or not the BB signal in the external output signal is in an ON state. If the BB medium signal is not ON in the step of Sk28, the process proceeds to the step of Sk46. If the BB medium signal is in the ON state of the Sk28 step, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sk29). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sk29, that is, when the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sk46, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sk29, that is, the big bonus Is finished, the BB signal in the external output signal is turned off (Sk30), the ending effect stage waiting time is set in the register (Sk31), and the detection of the adjustment switch 10 operation is enabled. After (Sk32), an effect waiting process (see FIG. 36) is performed to wait until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sk31 elapses (Sk33). After completion of the effect waiting process in the step of Sk33, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sk34), and then the process proceeds to the step of Sk35.

  In the step of Sk35, it is determined whether or not the automatic settlement function is set to be valid. If the automatic settlement function is not set valid in the step of Sk35, the process proceeds to the step of Sk37. If the automatic settlement function is set to be valid in the step of Sk35, the settlement process shown in FIG. 28 is performed (Sk36), Thereafter, the process proceeds to step Sk37.

  In step Sk37, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be valid. If the stop function is not set to be effective in the step of Sk37, the process proceeds to step of Sk46. If the stop function is set to be enabled in the step of Sk37, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. Then, the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sk39). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sk40). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. (Sk41), if the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, it is further determined whether the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sk42), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sk40. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sk40, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sk41, the operation proceeds to the step of Sk44, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sk42. If detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 28 is performed (Sk43), and the process returns to the step of Sk38.

  In step Sk44, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sk45), and it progresses to the step of Sk46.

  In step Sk46, initialization 4 is performed to initialize the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. Then, the game end process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether or not the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not activated during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is It is determined whether or not the bonus is inactive. If the bonus is inactive, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when operating the regular bonus, the RB in-signal indicating that the regular bonus is in progress is waited until the output waiting time of the RB signal has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Control will be performed. Further, even in the stopped state, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated, and even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the credit settlement control is performed.

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (main) executed by the CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, at an interval of 0.56 ms. .

  In the timer interrupt process (main), interrupts are first prohibited (Sn1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sn2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process (main) is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sn3). In the step of Sn3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed.

  Next, referring to the counter value for branching, it is determined whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sn4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sn8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sn23 described later is executed (Sn5).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is 1 by referring to the minute counter value, that is, whether or not it is a timer interrupt 2 (Sn6). Reel starting process (Sn7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step process (Sn8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sn9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a certain time has been sequentially executed, and then the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sn21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sn6, LED dynamic display processing (Sn10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, control signal output processing for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to an output port, etc. (Sn11), random number update processing for updating various software random numbers (Sn12), time counter update processing for updating various time counters (Sn13), and command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After the processing (Sn14) and the external output signal update processing (Sn15) for updating the external output signal are sequentially executed, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupt prohibited in the Sn1 step is permitted. (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 is found in the step of Sn4, it is further determined whether or not it is 3 by referring to the counter value for wake-up, that is, the timer interrupt 4 (Sn16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sn17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing through the origin of the rotating reels 2L, 2C, 2R (reel reference) (Passing position) is detected, the occurrence of a reel rotation error is detected, whether stop preparation is completed (stop preparation completion code is set), stop preparation is complete, and If it is rotating at high speed, the process at the time of passing through the origin (Sn18) that permits the operation of the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel, based on detection signals of various switches After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sn19) for determining whether or not the seed switch satisfies the detection condition, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step Is permitted (Sn21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sn16, when the stop operation position is stored in the work on the stop reel in accordance with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R or automatic stop control (other than final stop). The stop position is determined from the stop operation position stored in the work of the stop reel, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated, and at the final stop of the automatic stop control, the non-winning position table is referred to and When the number of steps reaches the non-winning position, the stop switch process (Sn22) for calculating how many steps should be stopped after, and the time to stop by counting the number of steps until the stop calculated by the stop switch process Stop process (Sn23) to start braking by two-phase excitation, and three phases after a certain time from the start of braking in the stop process After sequentially executing the final stop processing (Sn24) to be magnetized, the register saved in the stack area in Sn2 is restored (Sn20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sn1 step are permitted (Sn21). Return to processing.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop switch process executed in the timer interrupt 4 of the timer interrupt process (main) described above by the CPU 41a.

  In the stop switch process, first, it is determined whether or not the automatic stop flag is set based on whether or not the automatic stop flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sp1). Proceed to step Sp2.

  In the step Sp2, it is determined whether or not the reel is the final stop reel, that is, whether or not two reels have already been stopped. If it is not the final stop reel, the process proceeds to the step Sp7. It is determined whether or not (Sp3).

  If the stop preparation is not completed in the step of Sp3, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. On the other hand, if the stop preparation is completed in the step of Sp3, the non-winning position flag corresponding to the area number including the current step number of the non-winning position table is referred (Sp4), and the non-winning position flag is set to 1. It is determined whether or not any combination is not stopped on the winning line when stopped immediately (Sp5).

  If the non-winning position flag is 0 in the step of Sp5, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. On the other hand, if the non-winning position flag is 1 in the step of Sp5, the number of steps required to reach the stop position that can be stopped at the earliest stage is calculated, and the calculated number of steps is set (Sp6). ), The stop switch process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In steps Sp7 and Sp8, for all reels in the order of left, middle, and right, whether or not a stop operation position has been set for the work on the corresponding reel, that is, whether a stop operation has been detected or stopped by automatic stop If the stop operation has not been detected for all the reels or if stop has not been instructed, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  In addition, if any reel stop operation is detected in the step of Sp7, or if stop of the reel is instructed, the process proceeds to the step of Sp9, and the stop control table corresponding to the reel is referred to. From the area number including the step number of the stop operation position set for the work corresponding to the stop reel, the area number to be the stop position is specified, and the process proceeds to step Sp10, from the number of steps from the current reel reference position. After calculating the number of steps required up to the stop position specified in step Sp9 and setting the calculated number of steps, the stop switch process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  FIG. 40 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a in response to the occurrence of the interruption 2, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input and interrupting the start process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). That is, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed at the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not inputted, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the processing before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sr1), and then access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Sr2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sr3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Sr4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sr4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step Sr5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Sr5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or ending effect is being executed, the BB winning effect or ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Sr6). If the final stage has been reached, the final stage control pattern is set (Sr7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Sr9), the interruption is permitted (Sr10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in the step of Sw5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in the step of Sr6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Sr8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Sr9), the interruption is permitted (Sr10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sr4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after the RAM 91c is initialized (Sr11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Sr12). According to the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Sr9), and interruption is permitted (Sr10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (Ss1). If the command is not stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step Ss7. If the command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (Ss2), and the process proceeds to step Ss3.

  In the step of Ss3, in accordance with the received command, continuous effect processing for executing the continuous effect such as continuous effect lottery is executed, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss4.

  In the step of Ss4, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not an effect pattern for continuous effects is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effects is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss5.

  In step Ss5, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step Ss6.

  In step Ss6, in accordance with the control pattern set in step Ss5, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In step Ss7, after updating the values of various counters such as a random number counter in the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to step Ss8, where it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes zero so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of recovery.

  FIGS. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a in the step Ss5 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (St1). If the received command is a setting start command, the in-setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in step St1, it is determined whether the received command is an initialization command (St3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (St4), the above-mentioned standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St5), the control pattern setting process is terminated, Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in the step of St3, it is determined whether or not the received command is a standby command (St6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (St7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a standby command in the step of St6, it is determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (St8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of a stop state (St9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (St7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of St8, when the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (St11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state (St12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (St13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (St14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the release of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, that is, St13 is set (St15) Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an error command in the step of St11, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout start command (St16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (St17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as the sub-pattern in the step of St17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  If the received command is not a payout start command in the step of St16, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout end command (St18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (St19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of St19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel is finished, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step St18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (St20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (St21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (St22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (St23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern to be set is set as a control pattern (St24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no winning other than the big bonus is shown in the step of St23, the process proceeds to the step of St33.

  If the command received in step St20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (St25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step St29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (St26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (St27). If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (St28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in step St27, the process proceeds to step St33.

  In step St29, it is determined whether or not the received command is a reel stop command. If the received command is not a reel stop command, the process proceeds to step St33. If the received command is a reel stop command, it is determined based on the reel stop command whether the reel is stopped by automatic stop (St30).

  If it is determined in step St30 that the reels are not stopped due to automatic stop, the process proceeds to step St33. If it is determined that the reels are stopped due to automatic stop, whether or not all reels are stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not a reel stop command corresponding to all reels has been received (St31).

  If all the reels are not stopped in the step of St31, the process proceeds to the step of St33. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped, the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control. Even when the chance eyes are stopped, an automatic stop notification pattern for notifying that these chance eyes and reach eyes are invalid and that the small role notification effect is invalid is set as a control pattern (St32). The pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In step St33, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. Is finished, and the flow returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the reel starts rotating, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effectively detected by the player before the predetermined automatic stop time elapses. Then, the display result is derived to the corresponding reel according to the setting status of the winning flag and the timing of the stop operation. In other words, winning is generated not only by setting the winning flag but also by the player's technical intervention such as operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Security of sex will be secured.

  On the other hand, if a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reel starts rotating, if the reel is still rotating, automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop the rotating reel. That is, the time required for one game is not infinite, and even if the player is playing a game, a substantially sufficient operation rate cannot be obtained.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the start of reel rotation, if the reel is still rotating, automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop the rotating reel. However, the starting point for measuring the automatic stop time is not limited to the start of reel rotation. When the start switch 7 is operated, the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. This may be the case when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R disabled by the stop operation is enabled again, the last stop operation is performed, or the like.

  Further, when each reel is stopped by the automatic stop control, even if the winning flag for any of the combinations is set, the display mode of losing is always derived for each reel. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the winning display mode from being derived only by the contingency element, and to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  In addition, in the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to as in the case of the stop operation, and the response is based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to stop rotating, the reels that are stopped at the end do not have a role on any winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 symbols, that is, in the range of 5 frames. The number of sliding symbols is specified, and control is performed to stop based on the smallest number of sliding symbols. In other words, except for the reel that stops at the end, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control. However, the control is performed so that the winning combination is not arranged on any winning line. For this reason, a function for performing automatic stop control is added because it is sufficient to perform control to stop the reels in a common process regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control is performed except for the reel to be stopped last. In addition, even if a function that always loses during automatic stop is added, the stop control of the reel is not complicated.

  In addition, for the final stop reel, for every area number, if the stop position corresponding to each area number is immediately stopped, whether or not any of the roles are non-winning positions that are not aligned on the winning line is determined. A non-winning position table is created, and the non-winning position table is referenced at regular intervals (about 2 ms) shorter than the time varying by one frame, and the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is not winning Stop position that can be stopped at the earliest stage (a range of less than one frame) when it is determined that the area number to which the current step number belongs is a non-winning position by repeatedly performing the process of determining whether or not it is a position That is, the reel is controlled to stop at the position where the symbol corresponding to the area number stops at the lower stage, and when it is determined that the rotating reel is in the non-winning position, it slides one frame or more. Because it is possible to stop the display result that does not become a prize simply by stopping immediately, all the symbols within the drawing range every time the symbol moves one frame after the automatic stop time has elapsed, as before. Since there is no need to search for a non-winning position from among the above, even if a function for making sure to lose at the time of automatic stop is added in addition to the function of performing automatic stop control, the stop control of the reel is not complicated accordingly.

  After the shift to automatic stop control, the final stop reel may be controlled to stop immediately without slipping more than one frame when it is determined that the final stop reel is in the non-winning position. Since it is possible to perform stop control with a common program regardless of the number of steps at which the stop is started, the configuration of the control program associated with the automatic stop control can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the non-winning position table is displayed when the two reels except the last reel are stopped after the shift to the automatic stop control, or when the two reels are stopped and the shift is made to the automatic stop control. The current number of steps is created by performing a process of determining whether or not the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is a non-winning position by referring to the non-winning position table at a certain interval thereafter Is preferably a non-winning position, and it is preferable that the process of determining whether the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is a non-winning position can be performed in a short time, After transition to automatic stop control without creating a non-winning position table, when the two reels except the last reel stop or when the two reels stop and then shift to automatic stop control Based on the stop position of the reels that have been stopped at regular intervals, it is determined whether or not it is a non-winning position when it is stopped immediately in less than one frame at the current number of steps. Control may be performed to stop the reel at a stop position at which it can be stopped at the earliest stage (a range of less than one frame) at the time when it is determined.

  Further, in this embodiment, the stop control according to the winning flag is based on the stop control table according to the winning flag, but other control methods (for example, those based on the control method) described later may be applied. Well, even when other control methods are applied in this way, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag, regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end. In the case of the automatic stop control, the same effect as described above can be obtained as long as the control is performed so that only the reel to be stopped last is not aligned on any winning line.

  In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, the reel stop control table corresponding to all reels, that is, referring to data in which the stop position is determined in advance with respect to the stop operation position, Based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R, that is, control by the table system. In automatic stop control, the reels that are stopped last are stopped. As in the case where the operation is performed, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table with reference to the stop control table of the corresponding reel, that is, a table For reels that are controlled by the system and stop last, after the transition to automatic stop, when other reels stop, or other A non-winning position table is created when the reels stop and then the automatic stop is started, and the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is a non-winning position with reference to the non-winning position table. When the determination is made, the reel is stopped. For this reason, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of stop control tables for each stop mode pattern of reels that have already stopped in order to control so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line at the time of automatic stop, and It is possible to control so that the winning combination is not achieved by simple control only by determining whether or not the winning combination is located on any winning line.

  In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, all reels are controlled by the table method. In the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops last, the table is the same as when the stop operation is performed. For reels that are controlled by the method and stop last, refer to the non-winning position table and stop the reels when it is determined that the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is the non-winning position. Regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control, the table method is controlled except for the reel that stops last, and the reel that stops last is due to the stop operation. If there is control by the control method, if the last reel is stopped by the stop operation, the winning combination by the internal lottery is not used. Controls to draw the corresponding symbol within the draw range so that it is aligned on the winning line, and kicks the symbol within the draw range so that the part not won by internal lottery does not align on any winning line When performing the control and stopping the last reel by automatic stop, referring to the non-winning position table, it is determined that the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is the non-winning position In this case, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table for the reel to be stopped last.

  In a slot machine, the percentage of stop operations that are generally performed in the order of left reel, middle reel, and right reel is high. This is because humans tend to recognize side-by-side symbols and the like from the left side (for example, horizontal writing is written from left to right), and this order is most easily recognized.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are arranged in the horizontal direction, and generally there are many right-handed players, and right-handed games. For example, when a person performs an operation such as sliding the stop switches 8L, 8L, and 8R horizontally with a thumb or the like, it is easier to operate from the left to the right. It can be said that the ratio of the stop operation in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high after the start.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the medal insertion portion 4 is disposed on the right side of the front door as viewed from the player side, and the start switch 7 is disposed on the left side of the front door. . This is because, in general, there are many right-handed players, the medal insertion part 4 is arranged on the right side so that the medal can be inserted with the right hand, and the start switch 7 that is easier to operate than the medal insertion is arranged on the left side. Because it is. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In general slot machines, the start switch is usually arranged on the left side, and the stop operation is often performed from the left. Therefore, it can be said that after the start of the game, the percentage of stop operations in the order of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is high.

  On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when automatic stop control is performed, control is performed such that the stop is preferentially performed in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel. That is, when all the reels are rotating, control is performed to stop in the order of right, middle, and left, and when any reel has already stopped, the reels that are still rotating are set to the right, middle, Control to stop in priority in the order of the left is performed.

  For this reason, when the automatic stop control is performed, the reels stop in a stop order different from the stop order with a high ratio generally selected unless the left reel is already stopped. When the stop control is performed, it is possible to determine to some extent whether or not the stop control is based on the automatic stop from the stop order.

  In this embodiment, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the left reel is first stopped, a combination of “replay” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5. In contrast, when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “replay” symbol is drawn on the winning line L2 or L5 and the winning of the bell is performed. When the left reel is first stopped when the flag is set, control is performed so that a combination of “bells” can be arranged in any of the winning lines L1 to L5. When the reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, control for drawing the “bell” symbol on the pay line L1 is performed. In other words, in order to simplify stop control when stop operations are performed in a stop order other than the stop order that is generally selected, the left reel is first stopped in games where replays or bells are won. In other words, in general, when a reel having a high ratio of stopping first is stopped first, the control in which the winning combination of all the winning lines L1 to L5 can be matched, that is, the display modes are various. When the reels other than the left reel are stopped before the left reel, that is, when the reels that are generally low in the first stop ratio are stopped first, However, control that aligns only with a specific winning line among the winning lines L1 to L5, that is, control that simplifies the display mode is performed.

  In addition, when performing automatic stop control as described above, control is performed with priority in the order of the right reel, middle reel, and left reel, so if the bell or replay is won, the left reel Since the reels are stopped in the order of right and middle, except that is already stopped, at that time, the winning combination is controlled so as to be aligned only with a specific winning line among the winning lines L1 to L5. When these bells and replays are elected and automatic stop control is performed, the middle and right reels have bells on a specific winning line, except when the left reel is already stopped. Alternatively, the replay symbols are stopped and the left reel has a display mode in which the bells or replays are not aligned on the winning line where the bell or replay symbols are stopped in the middle and right reels.

  In this way, if automatic stop control is performed in the state where the bell or replay is elected, whether or not it is derived from the display mode with the automatic stop in the state where the bell or replay is elected Can be determined to some extent.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, reach eyes and chance eyes that are established when a specific display result is derived on the left reel are adopted, and these reach eyes and chance eyes can be established with automatic stop. However, if at least the bell or replay is won, it can be determined to some extent whether it is derived from the display mode as a result of automatic stop. In spite of being invalid, it is possible to reduce the misunderstanding of the player when the reach or chance is derived.

  In this embodiment, when the winning flag for replay is set, if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, a “replay” symbol is displayed on the winning line L2 or L5. When pulling-in control is performed and the bell winning flag is set, if the middle reel or the right reel is stopped before the left reel, the “bell” symbol is drawn on the winning line L1. However, when a replay or bell wins and the reels other than the left reel are stopped first, the winning line for drawing the winning symbol is not limited to the above, and the winning symbol is The winning line to be drawn is limited to a specific predetermined winning line (multiple or singular) that is smaller than the winning line to draw the symbol of the winning combination when the left reel is first stopped. Or if the.

  Further, in this embodiment, a combination that is established only by stopping “Cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a combination that is established only by any one of the reels is determined. Except for the case where a reel whose role is established alone is already stopped before the control is performed, control for stopping the reel at the end is performed. For this reason, even when a winning combination with only one of the reels is won, when performing automatic stop control, the order in which the reels are stopped is changed, or when the left reel is not the final stop reel, the same Since there is a possibility that the roles will be aligned in spite of the automatic stop, the control for stopping the left reel is different from the control when stopping by the stop operation, or the order in which the reels are stopped is set. Since there is no need to change the automatic stop control, it is possible to make the automatic stop control always a common control. Therefore, even if a combination that is realized by only one of the reels is adopted, the reel accompanying the automatic stop is used. The stop control is not complicated.

  In the present embodiment, when the automatic stop control is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R from that point until at least all the reels stop (actually, they are activated in the next game). Since the detection of this operation is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the derived display result is due to the stop operation by the player or due to the automatic stop. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the misunderstanding of the player when the reach eyes or chance eyes are derived even though the reach eyes or chance eyes are invalid due to automatic stop. .

  Further, in this embodiment, when all reels are stopped by automatic stop, the reels are stopped by automatic stop control based on the automatic stop notification pattern. The player is informed that the chance eyes and the reach eyes are invalid, and the reach eyes and the chance eyes are derived even though the reach eyes and the chance eyes are invalid due to the automatic stop. Can be reliably prevented from being misunderstood.

  Also, in this embodiment, when all reels are stopped by automatic stop, the fact that the small role notification effect is invalid is notified because the reel is stopped by automatic stop control based on the automatic stop notification pattern. In the game where the small role announcement effect is executed, even if the notified general role does not win, there is a possibility that the general role won by the automatic stop may not have won. It is possible to recognize that the special role is not notified by the role announcement effect, and the role that was automatically stopped and notified in the game where the small role notification effect was executed will not win In such a case, it can be reliably prevented that the player is misunderstood if the special role is won.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of stop controls in which stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating in the table, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any reel is already stopped, select a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel stop When all the conditions (and stopped positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to further select any one stop control table from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Therefore, the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reels, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reel is rotating, it selects a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel, and the selected stop control table. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reels are rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, for the spinning reel, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, for example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined in a specific reel. When the stop operation is performed, the same display result is derived. However, only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the other reels As the stop control table, a stop control table capable of deriving the display result constituting the chance eye was selected, and the same stop position was determined. When a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance is selected as a stop control table for another reel. It is preferable.

  For example, in the case of not winning any combination in the normal gaming state (losing), even if the left reel is stopped at any time in the area numbered 5-8, the “watermelon” "Bell Replay" is derived, but at this time, only when a stop operation is performed in the area of area number 7, as the stop control table for the middle reel, the above-described 11 for at least one area number is described. ~ 13th symbol "Cherry Replay Cherry", 21st, 1st, 2nd symbol "Cherry Bell Cherry" stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn is determined, that is, the display constituting the chance eye When a stop control table from which a result can be derived is selected and a stop operation is performed in the areas of area numbers 5, 6, and 8, any area number is set as the stop control table for the middle reel. The stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn in which the “cherry replay cherry” of the 11th to 13th symbols and the “cherry bell cherry” of the 21st, 1st and 2nd symbols are specified is not defined. In other words, a stop control table that cannot derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye may be selected. As a result, even if the stop position of the reel at the time when the specific reel is stopped is the same, the stop operation position is different so that the chance is finally controlled so that it can be derived, and the control cannot be derived Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display result of the reel from becoming monotonous when none of the roles is won in the normal gaming state (losing).

  Furthermore, in this case, when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state, among the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined, no combination is won in the normal gaming state. For many area numbers, it is preferable to select a stop control table capable of deriving a display result that constitutes a chance as a stop control table for other reels. In the case where any bonus is won in the game, the chances are derived at a higher rate than in the case where none of the roles are won in the normal gaming state. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the bonus.

  Further, when any of the reels is already stopped, the stop control uniquely determined for the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. In the reel stop control according to the table, each time the reel stops, the reel to be stopped is either the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, the corresponding It is preferable that a reel stop command capable of specifying the area number of the stop position of the reel to be transmitted is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In this way, the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 can detect when the reel is stopped. In addition, it is possible to perform different effects depending on not only the stop position of the reel but also the stop operation position.

  In particular, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the same display is displayed when a stop operation is performed within the range of the area number where the same stop position is determined on a specific reel. The result is derived, but only when the stop operation is performed in the area of the specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is determined, the display that configures the chance as the stop control table of the other reels Select a stop control table that can derive the result, and stop other reels when a stop operation is performed in an area other than a specific area number among the area numbers where the same stop position is defined As a control table, a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting an opportunity is selected, and any bonus is won in the normal gaming state. As a stop control table for other reels, the area numbers for which the same stop position is determined are larger than those in the case where no combination is won in the normal gaming state. When a stop control table capable of deriving a display result constituting a chance eye is selected, when the stop operation position satisfies the derivation condition of the chance eye when the reel stop command is received, that is, the chance eye When the stop control table from which the display result to be configured can be derived is a selected stop operation position, the ratio is higher than when other stop operation positions that do not satisfy the chance derivation condition but have the same stop position are used. Therefore, a special performance (for example, unusual stop sound, etc.) that informs the possibility of winning any special role may be performed. By doing so, the special effect is performed when the specific reel is stopped, which increases the possibility that the chance chance is finally derived as compared to the case where the special effect is not performed when the specific reel is stopped, As the special performance is performed, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the derivation of the chance and the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change). Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the table creation data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol varies. For example, an area in which the 1/2 symbol varies That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed, so that it is more diverse depending on the timing of the stop operation. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) is won, area numbers 4 to 8 or area numbers 10 to 10 shown in FIG. When a stop operation is made at any timing within the 14 range, that is, when the “Blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of 1 (1) cannot be pulled in even within a maximum of 4 frames, that is, 1 ( 1) If you cannot win a prize, if you do not win any role by internal lottery (losing), it will not be derived.・ "Watermelon Bell", 8-10 symbols "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" can be derived, if any bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (2) This In this case, the timing of any one of the area numbers 6 to 8 or the area numbers 17 to 21 shown in FIG. 8, that is, a maximum of 4 “red 7” symbols constituting one (2) combination. When a stop operation is made at a timing that cannot be drawn even within the range of frames, that is, when one piece (2) cannot be won, and when any of the roles is not won by internal lottery (losing) Since it is possible to derive the “Replay / Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols that make up the chance, which is not derived, the “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols, By deriving the display results constituting these chances, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the special role is won.

  Also, in this embodiment, if any bonus is won by internal lottery and any other combination is not won, or if only one (1) is won in the normal gaming state, and When only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, when the stop operation is detected at the timing of the area numbers 6, 7, 12, 13 “Replay / Watermelon / Bell” or “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols are derived as display results, but if no part is won (losing), the area number 6 Even if a stop operation is detected at any of timings 7, 12, and 13, "Replay / Watermelon Bell" of symbols 2 to 4 or "Bell / Red 7 / Bell" of symbols 8 to 10 are displayed as display results. Not derived Therefore, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or only one (1) is won and a stop operation is performed at a timing when one (1) cannot be won, or one (2) When a stop operation is performed at a timing when only one of them is won and one (1) cannot be won, the stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery. However, since it is possible to derive the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived, the display result that constitutes the chance eye is derived, thereby increasing the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus. be able to.

  In addition, if any combination is not won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal time, the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, and any bonus by internal lottery Except for the case where is won, it is possible to derive chance chances by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In this embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), a display result constituting a chance eye may be derived no matter what timing the stop operation is detected. No stop control table is created. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 The “blue 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (1) are not derived on any winning line for the stop operation position (area number) which is smaller than when only one (1) is won. Whether a display result that constitutes a chance eye derived when a stop operation is performed at the timing is specified and whether any bonus is won in the normal gaming state, 1 (2) The timing when the “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of (2) are not derived on any winning line with respect to a smaller stop operation position (area number) than when only (2) is won The stop control table for specifying the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is performed may be created as the stop control table for the left reel. As a result, the bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won, and at the timing when the winning one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. When a stop operation is performed, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived Thereby, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the middle reel In the state that is still rotating, regardless of the display result of the reels that have already stopped, the display result that constitutes the chance eye that is not derived if any role is not won (losing) When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the left reel is still rotating. "Blue 7" composing one ball combination on the winning line of "No. 7", or "Blue 7" composing one (1) combination on the winning line of the left reel Although the handle is stopped, the stop operation was performed within the range where the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination cannot be pulled in on the winning line where “Blue 7” is stopped on the left reel. Or when only one (2) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the middle reel is still rotating, and 1 on the winning line of the left reel The “Red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the two sheets (2) is not stopped, or the “Red 7” symbol constituting the one (2) combination is stopped on the winning line of the left reel. When the stop operation is performed within a range where the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of one (2) on the winning line where “Red 7” is stopped on the left reel cannot be drawn, If you are not elected (lost) Rukoto-free, and can be led to the center reel display results that make up the chance eyes.

  In addition, if any of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state and any other combination is not won, at least one of the reels is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating. Regardless of the display result of a reel that has already stopped in the state, if the winning combination has not been won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye is derived to the right reel. When only one (1) is elected in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel is already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, so that it is on the winning line of the left reel. If the "Blue 7" symbol that constitutes the combination of one (1) has not stopped, or at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating, If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination on the reel winning line is not stopped, and only one (2) is won in the normal gaming state, at least the left reel If the “Red 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of two (1) on the winning line of the left reel has not stopped, and at least the middle reel has already stopped and the right reel is still rotating Is already stopped, and the right reel is still rotating, and the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (2) combination on the winning line of the middle reel has not stopped. If the winning combination is not won (losing), the display result constituting the chance eye can be derived to the right reel without being derived.

  That is, when one of the bonuses is won, or when one (1) or one (2) is won and one of the reels is stopped and one (1) or one It is possible to win one (1) or one (2) when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won, or when any one reel is stopped. When one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be won because the stop operation was performed at a timing when the combination of one piece (1) or one piece (2) could not be derived, Since it is possible to derive the display results that make up the chance eyes that are not derived if they are not selected (losing), the display results that make up these chance eyes are derived. The role won It is possible to increase the player's expectation for Rukoto.

  In addition, only one (1) or one (2) is won, and one of the winning lines on the left reel winning line is a symbol that constitutes a combination of one (1) or one (2). Even if it is not stopped up, one stop (1) or one (1) on the winning line of the left reel because the stop operation was performed at a timing other than the timing at which the display result constituting the chance eye is specified. Even if the symbols constituting the combination 2) do not stop on any of the winning lines and the display result constituting the chance eye is not derived, the display result constituting the chance eye on the middle reel or the right reel Can be derived and the opportunity for deriving the display result constituting the chance eye is increased, so that the player's sense of expectation for the bonus can be effectively enhanced.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any bonus is won by internal lottery, or when only one (1) or one (2) is won, one of the reels is stopped. In the case where one (1) or one (2) could not be won already, a stop operation is performed at the timing of a specific area number, so that any combination is won by internal lottery. Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance eye that is not derived even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in the absence of the state, by deriving the display result that constitutes the chance eye, It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus.

  In addition, when none of the winning combinations are won by internal lottery (losing), that is, in the state of occupying most of the normal times, the display result constituting the chance eye is derived regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. In any case, except when one of the bonuses is won by internal lottery, it is possible to derive a chance by winning one (1) or one (2). For this reason, among all the stop control tables, when all the reels are rotating, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and the selected stop control is selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the table, and when any reel has already stopped, the internal winning state for each game state and the stop position of the stopped reel are uniquely determined. Even if reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, chances can be derived at an appropriate rate without being affected by the skill of the player. Become.

  In the present embodiment, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), the chance of the stop operation is detected at any timing regardless of the display result of the already stopped reel. A stop control table is created in which the display result that constitutes the game is not derived. For example, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), at least one reel The number of stop operation positions (area number) is smaller than when one of the bonuses is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won. On the other hand, a stop control table in which display results constituting a chance eye are specified may be created as a left reel stop control table. As a result, a bonus has been won by internal lottery, or one (1) or one (2) has been won and at least one reel has been stopped, and already one (1) or one (2) When it is not possible to generate a prize, it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes the chance eye at a higher rate than when no role is won by internal lottery, so the chance eye is derived. By doing so, the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced.

  In this embodiment, when the display result is derived for the left reel, the chance is not established, but when the display result is derived for any two reels or all reels (all winning combinations are The chance eye is established when the display result is derived to any one of the reels, for example, 8 to the left reel. A display mode that is established only by deriving the 10th symbol “bell / red 7 / bell” may be applied as an opportunity.

  In addition, for one (1) and one (2) that can be used to derive a chance when a prize cannot be won, a maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game is set. This is a prize that involves paying out 3 or less (1) medals, which is the number of medals required to win. Even if it is not, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of 1 (1) and 1 (2) will not greatly affect the payout rate of the slot machine 1, For example, it is possible to increase the probability that one (1) and one (2) winnings are permitted to increase the chances of deriving chances, effectively increasing the player's expectation for the bonus. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out with the winning of one (1) and one (2) is one which is necessary for setting the minimum number of bets for one game. Therefore, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  In this embodiment, one medal is paid out to the player with the winning of one (1) and one (2). The number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence is not limited to one, and it is preferable that the number of medals to be paid out with the occurrence of a specific award that can derive a chance is smaller, but at least for one game If the number of medals required for setting the maximum betable number (3 in this embodiment) (three in this embodiment) is less than or equal to, the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected. Also, for example, when the number of payouts differs depending on whether it stops at a plurality of pay lines like cherry or stops at one pay line, the number of payouts when the combination of combinations stops at multiple pay lines However, if the number of medals is less than the number of medals required to set the maximum bet number that can be set for one game (3 in this embodiment), the payout rate of the slot machine 1 can be hardly affected.

  Also, in this embodiment, when only one (1) or one (2) is won by internal lottery, it stops at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won. The number of stop operation positions (region numbers) in which the number of drawing frames specifying the display result constituting the chance eye derived when an operation is detected is one (1) or one (2) Since the number of draw-in frames for which the display result for the symbols constituting the combination to stop on any of the winning lines is specified is greater than the number of stop operation positions (area numbers) determined, one (1) in the normal gaming state (1 ) Or in the case where only one (2) is won, a display result is derived in which the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or one (2) stop on one of the winning lines. Higher than 1 (1) The display result constituting the chance chance derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing when one (2) cannot be won is derived, and one (1) is obtained by internal lottery. Or when only one (2) is elected, one symbol (1) rather than the symbols constituting the combination of the one (1) or one (2) being derived on any winning line ) Or one (2) cannot be won, and the display result that constitutes the chance to be derived when the stop operation is detected is more easily derived, so the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus A feeling can be heightened effectively.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or when one (1) is won, either “blue 7” symbol is drawn in the range of up to 4 frames. If the stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the area number 18 among the timings that can be stopped on the winning line of the game, it will not be derived if no winning combination is won. ˜17 symbols “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, if one (1) combination is not available on the winning line, a display result will be derived that will lead to a chance. When either bonus is won by internal lottery or when one (2) is won, draw “Red 7” symbol within the range of up to 4 frames If a stop operation of the left reel is detected at the timing of the region numbers 12 and 13 among the timings at which it can be stopped on the line, it will not be derived if no combination is won. No. 10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, if the combination of 1 sheet (2) is not aligned on the winning line, the display result that will lead to the chance eye is derived. The timing at which the symbols constituting one (1) or one (2) combination are derived on any winning line and one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected is not derived, it is possible to win one (1) or one (2) of the derived display results. Thailand If the display result which constitutes the chances eyes stop operation in ring is derived even when it is detected, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the bonus generation.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the big bonus (2) is won by internal lottery or only one (1) is won, a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18 shown in FIG. In the case where the bonus is selected, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols constituting the chance chance is derived as the display result, and when one of the bonuses is won by the internal lottery or only one (2) If the stop operation is detected at the timing of the range of area numbers 12 and 13 shown in FIG. 8, “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the chance eye is displayed. Although it is derived as a display result, if no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), even if a stop operation is detected at the timing of area number 18, FIGS. “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” is not derived as a display result, and the stop operation is detected at any timing within the range of the area numbers 12 and 13 and the “Bell / Red 7” “Bell” is not derived as a display result, so a bonus is won by internal lottery, or only one (1) or one (2) is won and one (1) or one When a stop operation is performed at a timing at which (2) can be won, even if a stop operation is performed at the same timing in a state where no winning combination is won by internal lottery, it will not be derived. Since it is possible to derive the display result constituting the chance eye, the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or one (2) are derived on any winning line and one (1) Or 1 (2 Even if the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which it is not possible to win a prize, the derived display result is one sheet (1) or one sheet (2 ), The player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus can be enhanced if the display result constitutes the chance to be derived even when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which the player can win.

  In this embodiment, since the common “blue 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and the symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2), The display result constituting the chance eye to be derived is derived even when the stop operation is detected at the timing at which the 17th symbol “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon”, that is, one (1) can be won. Thus, if the big bonus (2) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing targeting the “blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the big bonus (2) on the middle reel and the right reel. It becomes possible to stop the combination of the big bonus (2) on the winning line and win the game. Similarly, since the common “red 7” symbol is used as the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) and the symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1), 8-10. Even if a stop operation is detected at the timing at which the symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell”, that is, one (2) can be won, a display result constituting a chance eye is derived. If the regular bonus or big bonus (1) is won, the stop operation is performed at the timing aimed at the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the combination of the regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the middle reel, and the right reel The target is the “BAR” symbol that constitutes the regular bonus combination or the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes the big bonus combination. By performing the stop operation at timing, it is possible to prize is stopped in the game a combination of regular bonus or big bonus (1) on the pay line.

  The present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, as a symbol constituting the combination of one (1) and one (2), a symbol different from the symbol constituting the bonus combination is applied. Even in this case, one (1) or one (2) configuration symbol is derived on one of the winning lines, and one (1) or one (2) is won. Even when the display result constituting the chance eye derived when the stop operation is detected at a timing that cannot be performed, the derived display result is one sheet (1) or one sheet (2). The display result that configures the chance item including the configuration symbol of the symbol, that is, the chance item that is derived even when the stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won. Display result If so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Also in this case, the display result constituting the chance item including one (1) or one (2) constituent symbols includes the symbols constituting the bonus combination, that is, one (1). Alternatively, it is preferable that the display configuration is such that one (2) configuration symbol and the bonus configuration symbol both stop on the winning line, and even in this case, one (1) or one (2) Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing where a winning can be won, a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived is derived, so that if the bonus is won, the middle reel and the right reel are also won. The bonus combination selected in the game can be stopped on the winning line to win a prize by performing a stop operation at the timing of the symbols that make up the bonus combination. The ability.

  Also, in this embodiment, when no combination is won in the normal gaming state (losing), one (1) or one (2) is won regardless of the timing when the stop operation is detected. Even if a stop operation is detected at a timing that can be performed, a stop control table is created in which a display result that constitutes a chance eye to be derived is not derived. If no combination is won in the state (losing), than if any bonus is won in the normal gaming state or only one (1) or one (2) is won A chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (1) or one (2) can be won with respect to a small number of stop operation positions (region numbers). May be created a stop control table display result is identified as a stop control table of the left reel. As a result, when a bonus is won by an internal lottery, or when one (1) or one (2) is won, one (1) at a higher rate than when no part is won by an internal lottery ( 1) or 1 (2) Since it is possible to derive a display result that constitutes a chance chance to be derived even when a stop operation is detected at a timing at which one (2) can be won, 1 (1) Or, when symbols constituting a combination of one (2) are derived on one of the winning lines, and a stop operation is detected at a timing when one (1) or one (2) cannot be won Even when the display result constituting the chance chance to be derived is not derived, the stop operation is detected at a timing at which the derived display result can win one (1) or one (2). Case If the display results that make up the chance eyes are also derived, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, a display mode (region number 14) in which the 16th “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of one (1) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel. -16, 15-17, 16-18) and the display mode (area) in which the “red 7” symbol of No. 9 constituting the combination of one sheet (2) stops at one of the upper, middle and lower stages of the left reel No. 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) are arranged beyond the maximum pull-in range of 4 frames, respectively, and the stop operation position that can aim at the “red 7” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol at the same time Since it does not exist, when one of the symbols constituting the combination of one (1) or the symbol constituting the combination of one (2) is always aimed at stopping the reel, one (1), One of the two (2) can always be awarded Since it becomes impossible to perform a stop operation at a timing at which the other combination can be won, and in this case, a chance is derived, so 1 (1), 1 (2) Even if the reel stop operation is always performed aiming at one of the roles, it is possible to make the chance chance appear appropriately. In this case, the other one of the one (1) and one (2) Since it is impossible to determine whether or not the bonus has been won or whether the bonus has been won, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the occurrence of the bonus by the appearance of the chance.

  In addition, since one (1) and one (2) have the same winning probability and the same number of medals for winning a prize, one combination of one (1) and one (2) Since there is little merit to stop the reel by performing only this, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the willingness to perform the stop operation aiming at one of the one (1), one (2), stop at various positions There is a high possibility that the operation is performed, and the display results can be varied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the left reel, the 9th “red 7” symbols constituting the combination of one (2), the big bonus (1) and the regular bonus (1) are the upper and middle stages of the left reel. , The display mode (area numbers 7-9, 8-10, 9-11) that stops at one of the lower tiers, the combination of one sheet (1) and the combination of big bonus (2) No. 16 “blue 7 ”The display mode (area numbers 14-16, 15-17, 16-18) where the symbol stops at any of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the left reel is arranged in excess of 4 frames, each of which is the maximum drawing range. Since there is no stop operation position that can aim at the “Red 7” symbol and “Blue 7” symbol at the same time, the stop operation is aimed at the “Red 7” symbol and the “Blue 7” symbol is derived on the winning line. Can not be made and The “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” of the 8th to 10th symbols constituting the event is derived, and the Big Bonus (1) or the Regular Bonus (1) cannot be awarded in the end. If you didn't win, you won't know if you couldn't win one (1) or you couldn't win the big bonus (2) corresponding to the other "Blue 7" symbol, “Replay / Blue 7 / Watermelon” of the 15th to 17th symbols that make up the “Blue 7” symbol, the “Red 7” symbol cannot be derived on the winning line, and constitute the chance eye When the big bonus (2) could not be won, and no other combination was won, the other (2) could not be won. Legion corresponding to “Red 7” symbol Either because the error bonus or big bonus (1) was not able to prize winning is not known, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a bonus of occurrence.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (1) are respectively configured by the same “blue 7” symbol, The special symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) and the specific symbol constituting the combination of one (2) are each composed of the same “red 7” symbol. And the specific symbol are composed of different symbols, and at least the “red 7” symbol constituting the combination of the regular bonus and the big bonus (1) or the “blue 7” symbol constituting the combination of the big bonus (2) A display mode in which one of the symbols stops on the winning line (a display mode in which the “red 7” symbol or the “blue 7” symbol stops in either the upper, middle, or lower level), The display mode (display mode in which the specific symbol stops at either the upper, middle, or lower level) where the specific symbols that make up the combination (1) or (2) stop on the winning line is the maximum pull-in respectively. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained as long as the frame is arranged beyond the 4 frames.

  Further, in this embodiment, the 6th “cherry” symbol constituting the combination of cherries in which more medals are paid out in a normal gaming state in the left reel is the upper, middle and lower tiers of the left reel. Display mode (area numbers 4-6, 5-7, 6-8) and the 16th or 18th “blue 7” symbol that composes one (1) is the left reel The display mode (area numbers 14 to 16, 15 to 17, 16 to 18, 17 to 19, and 18 to 20) that stops at any one of the upper, middle, and lower levels exceeds the maximum drawing range of 4 frames. There is no stop operation position where the “cherry” symbol and the “blue 7” symbol can be aimed at the same time, and only one of the symbols can be aimed. Further, as described above, in the normal gaming state, when the cherry is won, more medals are paid out than when one (1) wins. No. 6 “Cherry”, which is a combination of cherries, cannot be stopped on the winning line at the timing aimed at the “Cherry” symbol, that is, the “Blue 7” symbol that constitutes one (1) combination. It is possible to increase the willingness to perform the stop operation at a timing at which the symbol can be stopped on any winning line.

  In addition, a maximum of 4 frames for the “Cherry” symbol of No. 6 and a stop operation position (area number 6 to 12) where the number of frames to be stopped to be stopped on any winning line is determined, and one (1) is won Stop operation position (area number) where the number of pull-in frames to stop the “Replay Watermelon Bell” of the 2nd to 4th symbols and the 8th to 10th symbols “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” which sometimes constitute the chance chance 4-8, region numbers 10-14) partially overlap, and when a stop operation is performed at these overlapping stop operation positions (region numbers 6-8, region numbers 10-12), If one (1) is won, the 2-4 symbol “Replay Watermelon Bell” and the 8-10 symbol “Bell / Red 7 / Bell” will stop. Become. For this reason, in accordance with the increased willingness to perform the stop operation at the timing at which the “Cherry” symbol No. 6 constituting the combination of cherries can be stopped on any winning line, one piece (1 ) Can be increased when the display results constituting the chance eyes are derived.

  In this embodiment, the cherry is applied as a special prize winning with a payout of more medals than the one (1) as the specific prize winning. As long as a combination including symbols that cannot be aimed at the same time as the symbols that make up the symbol is established by stopping on the winning line, winning is not achieved only with the left reel like cherry, but two or more It may be established by stopping the corresponding symbol on the reel winning line.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the chance is stopped, that is, when one of the bonuses is won, the display mode is derived at a higher rate than when no bonus is won. As a result of this, the continuous production will be executed, making it easier to understand the start of the continuous production and increasing the player's expectation for winning the bonus at both the chance and the continuous production. .

  Further, when the reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely identified from the stop operation position, for example, the player performs the stop operation at a timing other than the stop operation position at which the chance eye can be derived. In some cases, such as when playing a game, the rate at which chances are derived is extremely reduced, but in this embodiment, a continuous production lottery is executed in each game in the normal gaming state, and the continuous production lottery is performed. Even in the case of winning, continuous production is executed. That is, even when the chance is not derived, the continuous production is executed when the continuous production lottery is won. For this reason, even when the rate at which chance chances are derived is extremely reduced, the continuous performance is appropriately executed, so that the player's expectation on the bonus can be effectively increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance is derived, that is, when the combination of the display results of all the reels becomes the chance, the continuous effect is executed. When applying a chance that is established when one reel is stopped, if any one reel is stopped and a chance is established, continuous production may be executed from that point. .

  Also, in this embodiment, a continuous effect over a plurality of games is applied as a specific effect indicating the possibility of winning any of the bonuses, and the bonus is won over a plurality of games as well as one game. However, for example, an effect that is executed only for the next game with a chance chance may be applied as a specific effect, or since the chance eye is derived. An effect executed until the next game starts may be applied as the specific effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In this embodiment, the big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the cherry, one (1) or one (2) can be won simultaneously, and the big bonus (1) or big bonus Big Bonus (1) or Big Bonus (2) and Cherry are winning at the same time than the judgment value range where 1 (1) or 1 (2) is won at the same time The big bonus (1) or big bonus (1) or big bonus (2) and the probability of winning one (1) or one (2) at the same time are more than the big bonus (1) or big bonus The probability that (2) and Cherry will win at the same time is higher, so when Cherry wins than when 1 (1) or 1 (2) wins, Since the possibility of winning at the same time as the bonus (1) or big bonus (2) increases, the expectation of winning the special role will vary depending on the type of general role when the general role is won. Can increase interest.

  In this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding only to the special role, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Register the storage address of the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referred to from the combination table to the random number for internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special And general roles can be elected at the same time, but the role table for general roles where the storage addresses for general roles are registered and the special roles for which the storage addresses for the number of judgment values for special roles are registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role In addition to performing the lottery separately, the number of determination values stored in the address area registered in the general role table and the determination stored in the address area registered in the special role table By making it possible to specify from the number of values the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are each won, and the range of judgment values in which the general role and special role are won in duplicate, General roles are elected at the same time Even if such a configuration is used, even if a winning combination for a general role occurs as a result of the game, the winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied. In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the addresses storing the number of determination values referenced according to the set value are different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the setting value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set for the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the number of judgment values of each combination or combination of combinations referred from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, Whether or not each winning combination or winning combination is won is determined. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. It should be noted that when the winning determination table is generated before the actual winning determination is made, the loop processing is required twice, but according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing can be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency of the entire lottery process is high.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is determined for each game whether or not the value read from the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If the value read from the set value work is not in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, and therefore the value stored in the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6. If the value is not, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Then, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. Is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or illegal program operation, or if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, the set value automatically set by the slot machine The game is executed based on the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, since the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, the setting value selected by the amusement store side). Since it is ensured that the game is played, the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an illegal program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the main control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error state due to a RAM error occurs, and the setting key switch 37 is ON and the power Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 is performed, the malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Further, in this embodiment, once the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed, but the error state due to the RAM abnormality error occurs. When initialization is performed, all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1), and a reset operation is performed in this state. Thus, the game may be restarted.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port It is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA before performing the conversion or the like. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a does not perform the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. It can be carried out.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even if unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is on the winning line when all the reels are stopped.

  In the abnormal winning determination, if the combination is complete despite automatic stop (excluding cherries stopped before shifting to automatic stop control), if the combination that is not won in the internal lottery is combined, the special combination and the general combination It is determined that there is an abnormal winning when all of these are arranged at the same time.

  When it is determined that the winning is abnormal, that is, when a winning combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled to be in an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is disabled.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the winning combination is achieved despite the automatic stop (excluding cherries stopped before shifting to the automatic stop control), that is, despite the automatic stop, it malfunctions due to some abnormality and wins. If this happens, the progress of the game will be disabled. Therefore, even if a prize that should not be won is generated, it will not be processed as a normal prize and the fairness of the game will be improved. It will not be damaged.

  In addition, when a combination that has not been won in the internal lottery or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time, that is, when a non-winning role is won or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time The data may be destroyed or an abnormal program may be running. In such a case, the progress of the game will be disabled, and the fairness of the game will be impaired. There is no.

  Further, in this embodiment, once an error state due to an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game progresses unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. The disabled state is not released. In other words, when an unacceptable winning combination wins due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting selected and set based on the setting change operation Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value (generally, the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the game shop, which is the set value selected by the game shop), the game is fair. be able to.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines whether or not a winning combination that has not been won in the internal lottery has been won, if the value of the bit assigned to each type of winning combination is 0, the winning combination is won. When the value is 1, the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning combination is not won, and the value of the bit assigned to each type of winning combination is 1, that the winning combination has been won. And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not won when it is 1, and indicates whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. It becomes possible to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by simply referring to the value of the zero flag of the F register. The bit of the winning flag of the winning combination that has been established as in the past is specified, and the value of the specified bit Since it is not necessary to confirm It can be processed simplified when it is determined whether the prize.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of combination is 1, it indicates that the combination is won, and when it is 0, the combination is not selected. The internal winning flag shown is set in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the winning flag is performed to create an abnormal winning determination flag. It has become. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag can be easily created using the winning flag.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during periods when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize has occurred, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal memorized as the credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of BB winning indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Can be returned as a credit (including medals used to set the number of bets), so as much as possible to reflect the player's will, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  Further, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even when the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are to be returned even during the period when setting of bets is prohibited until the stoppage is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as belonging to the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the BB winning stage production waiting time elapses, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. When a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet amount is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of the error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect It is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses, an error occurs and the BB winning effect and the ending effect are awaited while the error is being controlled. The timing of the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect is resumed from the time when the timing of the time is interrupted and the error state is canceled. The time measurement may be performed without interruption even while it is controlled to the error state, and in this way, when the error state is canceled, the prohibition of the setting of the bet amount is canceled, The bet number can be set as early as possible and the bet number set in this state cancels the resumed BB winning effect and ending effect. Therefore, these effects are not bothersome for the player, but the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, It is possible to prevent a difference in state from occurring.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated at the same time as the transition to the big bonus. During the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is activated for each game. When it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus is activated in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to enhance the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the end condition is satisfied when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a specified value (465 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. If it is established, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is inactive, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is activated. If the regular bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the regular bonus operation starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Also, it may end when the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the total number of medals paid out minus the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets) exceeds a prescribed number. The process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a predetermined value (465 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions. For example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) Ends when the number exceeds the specified value, the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus ends To complete the Big Bonus end condition, or if any of these conditions is satisfied, the Big Bonus end condition It may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus while the game is in progress, it is possible to simplify the control associated with the transition to the big bonus, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied before the regular bonus is activated again, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In the present embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus has elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the presentation only by sending a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the presentation can be made various. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  For example, in the above embodiment, when the rotation of the reel is started and when the reel is stopped and the reel that is still rotating still remains, the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b are referred to. In addition, a stop control table is created for each spinning reel, but the internal control state for each gaming state and the stop control table for each reel stop state (and stopped stop position) are stored in the ROM 41b in advance. Based on the table index, it is possible to specify the necessary stop control table according to the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop state of the reel, and when the reel starts to rotate and when the reel Refer to the table index when the reels that have stopped and are still rotating still remain. By Le may be set a stop control table.

  In the above embodiment, 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (one symbol) are defined for one reel, and the stop control table corresponds to each area (area number). Then, the reel is used by using the stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined, that is, the stop control table in which the stop position is uniquely determined corresponding to the area where one symbol varies. For example, the number of drawing steps and the number of drawing frames (stop position) are uniquely set for each area of less than one symbol, for example, one step, that is, for every minimum unit when driving the reel motor. The reel stop control may be performed using a predetermined stop control table, and in this way, the stop position can be changed in units of the number of steps of the reel motor, and the stop operation position Against can be further diversified the stop position.

  Moreover, in the said Example, among the some stop control tables which defined the number of drawing | drawing tops with respect to a stop operation position uniquely, each internal winning state of each game state, the reel stop condition (and stop position stopped) A stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the selected stop control table and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. Is used in place of the stop control table, and when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table is referred to and the reel is stopped at the stop position uniquely specified corresponding to the stop operation position. You may do it.

  Further, by defining a stop priority for the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that uniquely determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (the number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. When a stop operation is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, and the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the highest stop priority is obtained. You may make it perform the control which stops a reel in a stop position.

  Also, select the number of draws that is uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel). When a stop operation is performed, if the target stop position is within the range of the selected number of pull-in frames, pull-in control is performed to pull the stop position and stop, and the stop is prohibited. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which other stop positions are pulled in and stopped so as not to stop the stop position. Since the stop position is uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) by performing the pull-in control and the kick-off control in this way, the control for deriving the display result by the pull-in control and the kick-off control is It can be said that this is a control pattern for uniquely specifying the stop position with respect to the stop operation position.

  In addition, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state, the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel), If the reel stop control is performed according to the control pattern, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control are performed in combination. For example, only the reel that has stopped first may be controlled to stop the reel by using the stop control table, and the other reels may be controlled to be stopped by pull-in control and kicking control.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected and its control is performed. The reel stop control is performed according to the pattern, but at least a control pattern uniquely determined for each internal winning state of each gaming state is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected control pattern. If it is good.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the value of 6 steps of the range of 1-6 is applied as a setting value used for internal lottery, ie, the setting value which determined the winning probability of internal lottery, a setting value is restricted to this. Any setting value that can select and set at least a plurality of setting values may be used. For example, a setting value that can select two steps of high / low and a setting value of three steps in the range of 1 to 3 are set. Selectable setting values may be applied. Further, the set value work in the RAM 41c stores the values 1 to 6 themselves as values indicating these set values. However, any value that can specify the set value may be stored. Corresponding to the set values of .about.6, 0 to 5 (value obtained by subtracting 1 from the actual set value) may be stored in the set value work.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the determination whether a setting value and the number of bets is appropriate is performed for every game, it is not performed for every game but for every predetermined number of games, or a specific period. It may be performed in a game (such as a period excluding bonus).

  In the embodiment, in the internal lottery process, it is determined whether or not the set value or the number of bets is appropriate. The timing may be any timing in one game, for example, the game start It may be performed at the time or at the end of the game.

  Further, in the embodiment, when determining the winning of the winning in the internal lottery process, if it is determined that the set value is not appropriate in the determination of whether or not the set value is appropriate, it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error state. However, if the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the probability based on the initial value of the setting value (for example, the setting value 1) It is also possible to determine whether or not a prize has been won.

  In the embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. Although it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, of course, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption processing, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 at the time of restoration. By determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, it may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is This is because the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H, so that the data of the RAM 41c can be determined to be normal.

  Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery, In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The condition is that the checksum is 00H and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normal. In addition, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. In the interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is determined. Alternatively, a checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, a RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated and compared with the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area. Data in RAM 41c is normal depending on whether the results match Whether may be determined. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the above embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 can be stored and confirmed at the start-up. Even in the configuration, when all areas are cleared to 0 at the time of startup, the data for destruction diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal, so it is stored in the RAM 41c. The accuracy of data abnormality determination can be increased.

  In the above embodiment, when the CPU 41a is started, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether or not the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. However, first, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and on condition that the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Without calculation, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated. However, the determination may be made every other opportunity, for example, for each game.

  In the embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41. However, the reset circuit is connected to the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work of the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects the power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or lower. You may make it detect a power interruption, when the period when the said DC voltage became below a fixed voltage continued for a fixed period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the above embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted in other places. For example, the game control board 40 may be connected to the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line is connected.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the error is alert | reported by displaying on the game auxiliary | assistance display 12 the error code according to the error state on the content of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 notifies the sub-control unit 91 of a command indicating an error state in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41. The notification unit controlled by the control unit 91 may notify the error, or the notification unit controlled by the game control unit 41 does not perform the notification, but the notification unit controlled by the sub-control unit 91 An error notification may be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is set to be invalid, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, the clerk performs a reset operation until the stop state is released The setting of the number of bets is prohibited in any of the periods, but any setting is possible as long as the setting of the number of bets is prohibited in at least one of these periods.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine not equipped with a stop function.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the waiting time for producing the BB winning effect and the waiting time for producing the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for production of the BB winning effect) at the time of winning. Regular bonus winning etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to multiple types of special roles. Furthermore, even for special roles of the same type, one of a plurality of types of bonus bonuses and regular bonus winnings (for example, a combination of symbols constituting the bonus winning, a color of symbols constituting the bonus winning) Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. In addition, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special combination (big bonus winning and regular bonus winning), and the type of big bonus winning or regular bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (ending waiting time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states (regular) Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and regular bonus) and the type of big bonus or regular bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  In the above embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special game states (Regular Bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. In addition, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are multiple types of big bonuses and regular bonuses (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, at the time when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled and the setting of the bet amount is prohibited ( In the ending effect stage waiting time, the credit can be settled. For example, in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined is the ending effect stage waiting time. Control to the stop state when reaching the, and prohibit both setting of the number of bets and the settlement of the credit until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the production waiting time of the ending effect, When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the above embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end processing. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. The end may be determined. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the timer counter common to the production wait time timer count for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the production wait time timer count for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is provided. However, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0 in the winning flag. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as a first modified example, as in the above embodiment, after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning flag and the winning symbol flag, all of the values thus calculated are calculated. The bits may be further inverted, and it may be determined that the regular winning is achieved when the result is FFH (all bits are 1), and the abnormal winning is determined when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0).

  As a second modification, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the winning symbol flags, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result is The regular winning may be determined when 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning may be determined when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the prize is abnormal by simply checking the value of the zero flag of the F register (flag register) indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is zero. Can be determined.

  Further, as a third modified example, a logical sum (OR) of the winning flag and a value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), the regular winning is obtained. , FFH other than (any bit is 0), it may be determined as an abnormal winning.

  As described above, also in the first to third modifications, the result of logical sum operation or logical product operation of the winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning flag and the winning symbol flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning symbol flag is other than 0. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning only by determining whether or not it is a value or a value other than 1.

  In the second and third modified examples, if the winning symbol flag set in accordance with winning is reversed in advance for all bits, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0. If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of the bit becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  In the case of the first and second modified examples, when determining whether the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and the calculation result is FFH when the value after the addition overflows. When the overflow does not overflow, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, the value of the carry flag in the F register indicating whether or not the operation result has overflowed is set. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning only by checking.

  Next, as in the above embodiment, the winning flag has a value of 1 corresponding to the winning combination, and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag corresponds to the winning combination. A description will be given of a modification in which, when the value of a bit is 1 and the values of other bits are 0, all flags do not invert all the bits and determine whether or not a winning combination is won. .

  In this modification, the winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, the value of the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the 0th bit of the winning flag to determine whether or not the subtraction result is a negative number. Subtract the first bit value of the winning symbol flag from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and determine the result. Finally, all the bits from the 0th bit to the 15th bit In step (1), it is determined that the winning is not abnormal, on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether the winning flag or the winning symbol flag is an abnormal winning without inverting the bit.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the determination value number storage area | region of RAM41c in which the determination value number used for an internal lottery is memorize | stored shall memorize | store the determination value number in each case using a 2 byte area | region. Of course, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is related to the set value. Even common items can be individually stored for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  Moreover, in the said Example, it was whether it memorize | stored in common with the whole setting value 1-6, or it memorize | stored separately with respect to each of the setting values 1-6 in the said Example. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number) Was stored. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the random number value for internal lottery, but from the value of random number for internal lottery that acquired the acquired determination value number, Subtraction may be performed sequentially, and the result of the subtraction may be used as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the range of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  In the embodiment, the slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slot machine for setting bets using game balls. Alternatively, it may be a complete credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, the ball capturing device 30 ′ and the ball capturing device 30 ′ for capturing game balls are used. In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 ′ for paying out a game ball, a ball payout, and a take-in ball detection switch 31 ′ for detecting the taken game ball A payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and generating a prize. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure showing a winning combination table. (B) is a figure which shows the classification table. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the table according to role. It is a figure which shows the example of the value of the random number for internal lottery in each game state, the judgment value number of each combination, and the relationship with a winning combination, respectively. It is a figure which shows the structure of the table index stored in ROM41b. It is a figure which shows an example of a stop control table. It is a figure which shows an example of a non-winning position table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a winning flag and a winning symbol flag. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a continuous production. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (main) which CPU of a main control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the stop switch process which CPU of a main control part performs in a timer interruption process (main). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
42 Random Number Generation Circuit 43 Sampling Circuit 90 Production Control Board 91 Sub Control Unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (5)

A variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable,
The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and one game is obtained by displaying the display result in all of the plurality of variable display areas. A slot machine that can be awarded according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in the plurality of variable display areas,
Data storage means having a storage area for storing data for controlling the game in a readable and writable manner;
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means, a permissible stage selection means for selecting any permissible stage from a plurality of types of permissible stages having different percentages in which the occurrence of winnings is allowed;
A permissible stage setting means for setting data indicating a permissible stage selected by the permissible stage selection means in a permissible stage storage area assigned to the storage area of the data storage means;
Before the display result of at least one of the variable display areas is derived, the data indicating the allowable level stored in the allowable level storage area is read, and a prize is awarded at a rate corresponding to the allowable level indicated by the read data. Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of
Each derivation operation means operated when deriving the display results of the plurality of variable display areas;
Timing start means for starting timing based on the establishment of a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game;
When the derivation operation means is operated at a stage before a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the timing start means starts timing, based on a control pattern according to the determination result of the advance determination means Operation-time derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result of the variable display area corresponding to the operation of the derivation operation means,
When the automatic stop time has elapsed after the timing start means starts timing, the display result combination is still changing so that the combination of display results does not constitute a winning combination when all the variable display areas are derived. Automatic derivation control means for performing control to derive the display result in the variable display area;
After display results are derived for all variable display areas, whether or not a prize is won depending on the combination of symbols stopped on each of n (n is an integer of 2 or more) winning lines that straddle all the variable display areas Winning determination means for determining
Disabling means for disabling the progress of the game when the winning determination means determines winning when the automatic derivation control means performs control for deriving a display result to the variable display area ;
After the progress of the game is disabled by the disabling means, the disabling of the progress of the game is canceled on the condition that the allowable stage is newly set by the allowable stage setting means, and the progress of the game Disabling means for enabling
With
The operation-time derivation control unit is configured to derive the display results in the variable display area in a specific order in the game determined to allow the generation of the specific prize by the pre-determination unit. Control is performed to derive a display result in the variable display area based on the first control pattern in which a combination of symbols corresponding to the specific winning line can be arranged on any winning line of the winning line, other than the specific order When the display result is derived in the variable display area in order, the specific winning line is limited to m (m is an integer) predetermined predetermined winning lines less than the n winning lines. Based on the second control pattern in which a combination of symbols corresponding to winnings can be arranged, control is performed to derive a display result in the variable display area,
The automatic derivation control means has a function other than the specific order when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses in a state where at least two or more variable display areas are still fluctuating after the timing start means starts timing. The variable display area other than the final variable display area for deriving the display result in the predetermined order and finally deriving the display result is set to a control pattern according to the determination result of the prior determination means. Based on this control, the display result of the variable display area is derived, and all the variable display areas are derived for the final variable display area, not based on the control pattern according to the determination result of the predetermining means. Control to derive a display result in which the combination of display results at the time is a combination that does not constitute a prize,
A slot machine characterized by that. The operation time derivation control means has a display mode different from the combination of display results corresponding to the special prize when it is determined by the prior decision means that the occurrence of a special prize advantageous to the player is allowed. Yes, it is a combination that is not derived when it is not determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted, and it is determined that the occurrence of the special prize is permitted. While performing the control to derive the display result in the variable display area based on the control pattern capable of deriving a predetermined combination,
The slot machine allows the occurrence of the special prize even when the combination of the display results of the variable display area is the predetermined combination when the display result is derived to the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means. A display result invalidity notifying means for notifying that it is not determined to be performed,
The slot machine according to claim 1. Winning acceptance notifying means for notifying that it is determined by the predetermining means that the generation of any winning is permitted before display results are derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas;
When the display result is derived in the variable display area by the automatic derivation control means, the winning allowance notification invalid notification means for notifying that the notification by the winning allowance notification means is invalid;
Comprising
The slot machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized by the above-mentioned. The pre-determining means determines whether or not to allow the generation of a prize including a special prize that is established only by deriving a special display result in any one specific variable display area,
The automatic derivation control means, when the automatic stop time has passed in a state where two or more variable display areas including at least the specific variable display area are still fluctuating after the timing start means starts timing, In a predetermined order with a specific variable display area as the last, control is performed to derive a display result in which a combination of display results is a combination that does not constitute a prize when all variable display areas are derived.
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 . Derivation operation invalidating the operation of the derivation operation means during a period from when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measurement start means starts timing until the display results are derived in at least all variable display areas Providing the means for
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 .

Images